Communication device

ABSTRACT

The communication device comprising a voice communication implementer, a calculation implementer, a bold formatting implementer, an italic formatting implementer, a font formatting implementer, a stereo audio data output implementer, a multiple language implementer, a caller&#39;s information displaying implementer, and an icon displaying implementer.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 13/011,461, filed2011 Jan. 21, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,064,954 which is a continuation ofU.S. Ser. No. 11/688,901, filed 2007 Mar. 21, now U.S. Pat. No.7,890,136 which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 10/710,600, filed2004 Jul. 23, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, which claims the benefit ofU.S. Provisional Application No. 60/481,426, filed 2003 Sep. 26, all ofwhich are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND OF INVENTION

The invention relates to communication device and more particularly tothe communication device which is capable to communicate with anothercommunication device in a wireless fashion.

U.S. Patent Publication No. 20040054745 is introduced as prior art ofthe present invention of which the summary is the following: ‘Acommunication system and method for supporting multiple languages for amobile communication terminal. The system and method include a mobilecommunication network, a multiple language contents provider server(MLCPS) connected to the mobile communication network and havingmultiple language contents, and a mobile communication terminalwirelessly connected to the mobile communication network. The mobilecommunication terminal connects to the MLCPS through the mobilecommunication network, and transmits language package request dataincluding at least one string set version and one font set version tothe MLCPS according to request of a user. The mobile communicationterminal also receives language package information provided by theMLCPS, divides the received language package information into a stringset and a font set corresponding to languages and manages the string setand the font set, and displays menus and messages on a display window ofthe mobile communication terminal by a language selected by a user usingthe managed string set and font set. The MLCPS forms a correspondinglanguage package in response to reception of the language packagerequest data and transmits the language package to the mobilecommunication terminal through the mobile communication network.’However, this prior art does not disclose the communication devicecomprising a voice communication implementer, a calculation implementer,a bold formatting implementer, an italic formatting implementer, a fontformatting implementer, a stereo audio data output implementer, amultiple language implementer, a caller's information displayingimplementer, and an icon displaying implementer.

For the avoidance of doubt, the number of the prior arts introducedherein (and/or in IDS) may be of a large one, however, applicant has nointent to hide the more relevant prior art(s) in the less relevant ones.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

It is an object of the present invention to provide a device capable toimplement a plurality of functions.

It is another object of the present invention to provide merchandise tomerchants attractive to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide mobility to theusers of communication device.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the users of communication device or any tangible thingin which the communication device is fixedly or detachably (i.e.,removably) installed.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

The present invention introduces the communication device comprising avoice communication implementer, a calculation implementer, a boldformatting implementer, an italic formatting implementer, a fontformatting implementer, a stereo audio data output implementer, amultiple language implementer, a caller's information displayingimplementer, and an icon displaying implementer.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

The above and other aspects, features, and advantages of the inventionwill be better understood by reading the following more particulardescription of the invention, presented in conjunction with thefollowing drawing, wherein:

FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary embodiment of thepresent invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The following description is of the best presently contemplated mode ofcarrying out the present invention. This description is not to be takenin a limiting sense but is made merely for the purpose of describing thegeneral principles of the invention. For example, each description ofrandom access memory in this specification illustrate(s) only onefunction or mode in order to avoid complexity in its explanation,however, such description does not mean that only one function or modecan be implemented at a time. In other words, more than one function ormode can be implemented simultaneously by way of utilizing the samerandom access memory. In addition, the figure number is cited after theelements in parenthesis in a manner for example ‘RAM 206 (FIG. 1)’. Itis done so merely to assist the readers to have a better understandingof this specification, and must not be used to limit the scope of theclaims in any manner since the figure numbers cited are not exclusive.There are only few data stored in each storage area described in thisspecification. This is done so merely to simplify the explanation and,thereby, to enable the reader of this specification to understand thecontent of each function with less confusion. Therefore, more than fewdata (hundreds and thousands of data, if necessary) of the same kind,not to mention, are preferred to be stored in each storage area to fullyimplement each function described herein. The scope of the inventionshould be determined by referencing the appended claims.

FIG. 1 is a simplified block diagram of the Communication Device 200utilized in the present invention. In this embodiment, CommunicationDevice 200 includes CPU 211 which controls and administers the overallfunction and operation of Communication Device 200. CPU 211 uses RAM 206to temporarily store data and/or to perform calculation to perform itsfunction, and to implement the present invention, modes, functions, andsystems explained hereinafter. Video Processor 202 generates analogand/or digital video signals which are displayed on LCD 201. ROM 207stores the data and programs which are essential to operateCommunication Device 200. Wireless signals are received by Antenna 218and processed by Signal Processor 208. Input signals are input by InputDevice 210, such as a dial pad, a joystick, and/or a keypad, and thesignals are transferred via Input Interface 209 and Data Bus 203 to CPU211. Indicator 212 is an LED lamp which is designed to output differentcolors (e.g., red, blue, green, etc). Analog audio data is input toMicrophone 215. A/D 213 converts the analog audio data into a digitalformat. Speaker 216 outputs analog audio data which is converted into ananalog format from digital format by D/A 204. Sound Processor 205produces digital audio signals that are transferred to D/A 204 and alsoprocesses the digital audio signals transferred from A/D 213. CCD Unit214 captures video image which is stored in RAM 206 in a digital format.Vibrator 217 vibrates the entire device by the command from CPU 211.

As another embodiment, LCD 201 or LCD 201/Video Processor 202 may beseparated from the other elements described in FIG. 1, and be connectedin a wireless fashion to be wearable and/or head-mountable.

When Communication Device 200 is in the voice communication mode, theanalog audio data input to Microphone 215 is converted to a digitalformat by A/D 213 and transmitted to another device via Antenna 218 in awireless fashion after being processed by Signal Processor 208, and thewireless signal representing audio data which is received via Antenna218 is output from Speaker 216 after being processed by Signal Processor208 and converted to analog signal by D/A 204. For the avoidance ofdoubt, the definition of Communication Device 200 in this specificationincludes so-called ‘PDA’. The definition of Communication Device 200also includes in this specification any device which is mobile and/orportable and which is capable to send and/or receive audio data, textdata, image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wirelessfashion via Antenna 218. The definition of Communication Device 200further includes any micro device embedded or installed into devices andequipments (e.g., VCR, TV, tape recorder, heater, air conditioner, fan,clock, micro wave oven, dish washer, refrigerator, oven, washingmachine, dryer, door, window, automobile, motorcycle, and modem) toremotely control these devices and equipments. The size of CommunicationDevice 200 is irrelevant. Communication Device 200 may be installed inhouses, buildings, bridges, boats, ships, submarines, airplanes, andspaceships, and firmly fixed therein.

Paragraph [0024]—This Paragraph [0024] illustrate(s) the elements ofCommunication Device 200. The elements of Communication Device 200described in this Paragraph [0024] is identical to the ones described inFIG. 1, except Communication Device 200 has new element, i.e., LED 219.Here, LED 219 receives infra red signals from other wireless devices,which are transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. LED 219 also sendsinfra red signals in a wireless fashion which are composed by CPU 211and transferred via Data Bus 203. As the second embodiment, LED 219 maybe connected to Signal Processor 208. Here, LED 219 transfers thereceived infra red signals to Signal Processor 208, and Signal Processor208 processes and converts the signals to a CPU readable format whichare transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. The data produced by CPU211 are processed by Signal Processor 208 and transferred to anotherdevice via LED 219 in a wireless fashion. The task of LED 219 is as sameas that of Antenna 218 described in FIG. 1 except that LED 219 utilizesinfra red signals for implementing wireless communication in the secondembodiment. For the avoidance of doubt, the reference to FIG. 1 (e.g.,referring to FIG. 1 in parenthesis) automatically refers to thisParagraph [0024] in this specification.

Paragraph [0025]—This Paragraph [0025] illustrate(s) the data stored inHost H. In the present embodiment, Host H includes Host InformationStorage Area H00a which stores various types of data to assist and/orco-operate with Communication Device 200 to implement all modes,functions, and systems described in this specification. As anotherembodiment, Host H may be composed of a plurality of computers, i.e.,one master computer and a plurality of slave computers, wherein themaster computer is connected to the plurality of slave computers. Asanother embodiment, Host H may also be composed of a plurality of mastercomputers by way of utilizing peer-to-peer connection.

Paragraph [0026]—<<3D Video Game Function>>

Paragraph [0027]—This Paragraph [0027] through Paragraph [0035]illustrate the video game function of Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0028]—In this embodiment, Host H includes Host Game DataStorage Area Ha. In Host Game Data Storage Area Ha, a plurality of gamedata are stored for downloading purposes. Games G1, G2, G3, and G4 arestored in Host Game Data Storage Area Ha in the example illustrated inParagraph [0027].

Paragraph [0029]—This Paragraph [0029] illustrates the sequence toinitiate the game function. First of all, a list of modes is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an input signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select aspecific mode (S2), the selected mode is activated. In the presentexample described in Paragraph [0029], the communication mode isactivated (S3a) when the communication mode is selected in the previousstep, the game download mode is activated (S3b) when the game downloadmode is selected in the previous step, and the game play mode isactivated (S3c) when game play mode is selected in the previous step.The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selected and activated inS2 and S3 may include all functions and modes explained in thisspecification. Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can beactivated while the first activated mode is still implemented by goingthrough the steps of S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling aplurality of functions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).Here, communication mode is a mode which enables Communication Device200 to communicate (i.e., send and/or receive audio data, text data,image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wireless fashionvia Antenna 218) in a wireless fashion with other Communication Devices200. The same meaning applies hereinafter.

Paragraph [0030]—This Paragraph [0030] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate(as described in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform gamedownload mode is stored in Game DL Data Storage Area 2061b, and the datato activate (as described in S3c of the previous paragraph) and toperform game play mode is stored in 2061c.

Paragraph [0031]—This Paragraph [0031] illustrates the method ofactivating and deactivating the game mode by utilizing the voicerecognition system explained hereinbefore. The voice recognition systemis turned on, in the first place (S1), and the game mode is activated byutilizing the voice recognition system (S2). When utilizing the gamemode is over, it is deactivated by utilizing the voice recognitionsystem, and the system is turned off thereafter (S3).

Paragraph [0032]—This Paragraph [0032] illustrates the sequence ofdownloading a game data, i.e., a game software program, from Host H(Paragraph [0027]). In this embodiment, a list of game data is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an input signal is input from InputDevice 210 or by the voice recognition system to select a specific gamedata (S2), the selected game data is downloaded to Communication Device200 and is stored in Game DL Data Storage Area 2061b (Paragraph [0030])(S3). The downloaded game data is decompressed thereafter by CPU 211(FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0033]—This Paragraph [0033] illustrates the data stored inGame Play Data Storage Area 2061c (Paragraph [0030]). The decompressedgame data are allocated to the predetermined areas, i.e., Game SoftwareStorage Area 2061d, 3D Object Data Storage Area 2061e, Texture DataStorage Area 2061f, and Game Process Data Storage Area 2061g. Here, GameSoftware Storage Area 2061d stores a series of software program toperform the game function of Communication Device 200. 3D Object DataStorage Area 2061e stores the three-dimensional data of thethree-dimensional objects displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), such as theshape of each three-dimensional object in a polygon form (or in a wireframe form), and the three-dimensional data of all parts (components) ofeach three-dimensional object. Texture Data Storage Area 2061f stores aplurality of data of textures which are ‘pasted’ on eachthree-dimensional object (or on each part thereof) when suchthree-dimensional object is displayed on LCD 201. Game Process DataStorage Area 2061g stores a plurality of data necessary to process thegame software program, such as the strength and speed of eachthree-dimensional object, the layout of the background displayed on LCD201, the weather described in the game, the property of each shadowdisplayed adjacent to the three-dimensional object, the movement of theobjects which are controllable by the user of Communication Device 200,and the movement of the objects which are not controllable by the userof Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0034]—This Paragraph [0034] illustrates the sequence of thegame software program stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061d(Paragraph [0033]). When the game mode is started by voice recognitionsystem as described in S1 and S2 of Paragraph [0031], the gameinitiation process is initiated by CPU 211 (FIG. 1) (S1). Here, CPU 211reads, by following the instructions written in the game softwareprogram stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061d, all the address datastored in 3D Object Data Storage Area 2061e, Texture Data Storage Area2061f, and Game Process Data Storage Area 2061g to promptly retrieve therequired data to process the game when necessary. During the gameinitiation process, an initiation screen is displayed on LCD 201. Oncethe game is started, CPU 211 checks the status of the input signal fromInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by the voice recognition system. If aninput signal is detected (S2), a response to such input signal isprocessed by CPU 211 by retrieving data from Game Process Data StorageArea 2061g (Paragraph [0033]) (S3). For example, if the input signalinstructs to move forward the three-dimensional object, CPU 211calculates the next action of its body parts (e.g., pushing forward itsright leg) by retrieving data from Game Process Data Storage Area 2061g(Paragraph [0033]). CPU 211 also processes with the three-dimensionalobjects which are irrelevant to the input signal input from Input Device210 by retrieving data from Game Process Data Storage Area 2061g, forexample the background objects displayed on LCD 201 including, clouds,pedestrians, buildings, traffic lights, and bridges (S4). CPU 211 alsocalculates the three-dimensional data of each three-dimensional objectand the three-dimensional data of all parts thereof in thethree-dimensional game space by retrieving data from three-dimensionalobject Data Storage Area 2061e (S4). CPU 211 then retrieves thedesignated textures from Texture Data Storage Area 2061f (Paragraph[0033]) and ‘pastes’ them to the three-dimensional objects (S4). Thethree-dimensional objects with textures ‘pasted’ are displayed on LCD201 (S5). The sequence of S2 through S5 is repeated until the game isover (S6), and the game termination process, i.e., a process toterminate the game mode is initiated thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0035]—This Paragraph [0035] illustrates the process toallocate Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) to perform the game function. In thisembodiment, when the game initiation process is initiated as explainedin S1 of Paragraph [0034], the key allocation process is initiatedsimultaneously. As the result of the key allocation process, InputDevice 210 normally utilized for communication purposes, includingkeypad and buttons, is allocated as input means for performing the gamefunction. In the example described in Paragraph [0035], Key #1 isassigned for instructing CPU 211 to move up the three-dimensionalobject, Key #2 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to move down thethree-dimensional object, Key #3 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 tomove left the three-dimensional object, Key #4 is assigned forinstructing CPU 211 to move right the three-dimensional object, Key #5is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to make the three-dimensional objectto jump, and Key #6 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to make thethree-dimensional object to dash, and all the foregoing data are storedin Key Allocation Data Storage Area 2061h.

Paragraph [0036]—<<Auto Time Adjust Function>>

Paragraph [0037]—Paragraph [0038] through Paragraph [0040] illustratethe automatic time adjust function, i.e., a function which automaticallyadjusts the clock of Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0038]—This Paragraph [0038] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Auto Time AdjustSoftware Storage Area 2069a, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b, andAuto Time Data Storage Area 2069c. Auto Time Adjust Software StorageArea 2069a stores software program to implement the present functionwhich is explained in details hereinafter, Current Time Data StorageArea 2069b stores the data which represents the current time, and AutoTime Data Storage Area 2069c is a working area assigned for implementingthe present function.

Paragraph [0039]—This Paragraph [0039] illustrates a software programstored in Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069a (Paragraph[0038]). First of all, Communication Device 200 is connected to NetworkNT (e.g., the Internet) via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then retrieves an atomic clock data from Network NT (S2) and the currenttime data from Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b (Paragraph [0038]),and compares both data. If the difference between both data is notwithin the predetermined value X (S3), CPU 211 adjusts the current timedata (S4). The method to adjust the current data can be either simplyoverwrite the data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b withthe atomic clock data retrieved from Network NT or calculate thedifference of the two data and add or subtract the difference to or fromthe current time data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b byutilizing Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069c (Paragraph [0038]) as aworking area.

Paragraph [0040]—This Paragraph [0040] illustrates another softwareprogram stored in Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069a(Paragraph [0038]). When the power of Communication Device 200 is turnedon (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores a predetermined timer value in AutoTime Data Storage Area 2069c (Paragraph [0038]) (S2). The timer value isdecremented periodically (S3). When the timer value equals to zero (S4),the automatic timer adjust function is activated (S5) and CPU 211performs the sequence described in Paragraph [0039], and the sequence ofS2 through S4 is repeated thereafter.

Paragraph [0041]—<<Video/Photo Mode>>

Paragraph [0042]—This Paragraph [0042] illustrates the details of CCDUnit 214 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CCD Unit 214 is mounted onRotator 291 (not shown) which is rotatably connected to the side ofCommunication Device 200. Indicator 212 (FIG. 1) is attached to thesurface of CCD Unit 214.

Paragraph [0043]—This Paragraph [0043] illustrates the software programinstalled in Communication Device 200 to initiate the present function.First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1).When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2), theselected mode is activated. In the present example, the communicationmode is activated (S3a) when the communication mode is selected in theprevious step, the game download mode and the game play mode areactivated (S3b) when the game download mode and the game play mode areselected in the previous step of which the details are described inParagraph [0029], and the video/photo mode is activated (S3c) when thevideo/photo mode is selected in the previous step. The modes displayedon LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include allfunctions and modes explained in this specification. Once the selectedmode is activated, another mode can be activated while the firstactivated mode is still implemented by going through the steps of S1through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality of functionsand modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0044]—This Paragraph [0044] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate(as described in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are described in Paragraph[0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previousparagraph) and to perform the video/photo mode is stored in Video/PhotoData Storage Area 20610a.

Paragraph [0045]—This Paragraph [0045] illustrates the software programsand data stored in Video/Photo Data Storage Area 20610a (Paragraph[0044]). In this embodiment, Video/Photo Data Storage Area 20610aincludes Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b, Video Data StorageArea 20610c, Audio Data Storage Area 20610d, Photo Data Storage Area20610e, Photo Sound Data Storage Area 20610f, and Indicator Data StorageArea 20610g. Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b stores thesoftware programs described in Paragraph through Paragraph [0055],Paragraph [0058], Paragraph [0058], Paragraph [0063] through Paragraph[0065], Paragraph [0067], and Paragraph [0069]. Video Data Storage Area20610c stores the data described in Paragraph [0046]. Audio Data StorageArea 20610d stores the data described in Paragraph [0047]. Photo DataStorage Area 20610e stores the data described in Paragraph [0048]. PhotoSound Data Storage Area 20610f stores a sound data (preferably a wavedata) producing a sound similar to the one when a conventional camera isactivated. Indicator Data Storage Area 20610g stores the data describedin Paragraph [0049]. Video Data Storage Area 20610c and Audio DataStorage Area 20610d primarily stores the similar data stored in Area 267(not shown) and Area 268 (not shown), respectively.

Paragraph [0046]—This Paragraph [0046] illustrates the data stored inVideo Data Storage Area 20610c (Paragraph [0045]). Video Data StorageArea 20610c stores a plurality of video data which goes through theprocess described in Paragraph [0053] hereinafter. In the presentexample, six video data, i.e., Video #1, Video #2, Video #3, Video #4,Video #5, and Video #6, are currently stored in Video Data Storage Area20610c. Message Data Storage Area (MS2a, MS3a) 20610h is also includedin Video Data Storage Area 20610c, which stores the text data of MS2a(‘REC’) and MS3a (‘STOP’).

Paragraph [0047]—This Paragraph [0047] illustrates the data stored inAudio Data Storage Area 20610d (Paragraph [0045]). Audio Data StorageArea 20610d stores a plurality of audio data which goes through theprocess described in Paragraph [0053] hereinafter. In the presentexample, six audio data, i.e., Audio #1, Audio #2, Audio #3, Audio #4,Audio #5, and Audio #6 are currently stored in Audio Data Storage Area20610d. Each audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610dcorresponds to the video data stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610c(Paragraph [0046]). Namely, Video #1 corresponds to Audio #1, Video #2corresponds to Audio #2, Video #3 corresponds to Audio #3, Video #4corresponds to Audio #4, Video #5 corresponds to Audio #5, and Video #6corresponds to Audio #6.

Paragraph [0048]—This Paragraph [0048] illustrates the data stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20610e (Paragraph [0045]). Photo Data StorageArea 20610e stores a plurality of photo data which goes through theprocess described in Paragraph [0067] hereinafter. In the presentexample, six photo data, i.e., Photo #1, Photo #2, Photo #3, Photo #4,Photo #5, and Photo #6 are currently stored in Photo Data Storage Area20610e. Message Data Storage Area (MS4a) 20610i is also included inPhoto Data Storage Area 20610e, which stores the text data of MS4a(‘SHOT’).

Paragraph [0049]—This Paragraph [0049] illustrates the data stored inIndicator Data Storage Area 20610g (Paragraph [0045]). Indicator DataStorage Area 20610g stores the data regarding the color of Indicator 212(FIG. 1 and Paragraph [0042]) when Communication Device 200 is in avideo mode or a photo mode. According to the data described in Paragraph[0049], Indicator 212 emits red light when Communication Device 200 isin the video mode and green light when Communication Device 200 is inthe photo mode.

Paragraph [0050]—This Paragraph [0050] illustrates another example ofthe data stored in Indicator Data Storage Area 20610g (Paragraph[0045]). According to the data described in Paragraph [0050], Indicator212 emits a predetermined color, however, with a different pattern.Namely, the light emitted from Indicator 212 turns on and off whenCommunication Device 200 is in the video mode, whereas the light remainson when Communication Device 200 is in the photo mode.

Paragraph [0051]—This Paragraph [0051] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045]).In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays a list of the selectablemodes, i.e., the video mode and the photo mode (S1). One of the modes isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S2).

Paragraph [0052]—This Paragraph [0052] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045]).When the video mode is selected in S2 in Paragraph [0051], the videomode is initiated and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) is ready to capture and store thevideo data in one of the areas of Video Data Storage Area 20610c(Paragraph [0046]) (S1). Next, the video process is initiated which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0053] (S2a) until a specific signalis input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3). The indicator process is activated simultaneously which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0054] hereinafter (S2b).

Paragraph [0053]—This Paragraph [0053] illustrates the video process ofCommunication Device 200, i.e., S2a of Paragraph [0052]. In thisembodiment, the video data input from CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1 and Paragraph[0042]) (S1a) is converted from analog data to digital data (S2a) and isprocessed by Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S3a). The processed videodata is stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610c (Paragraph [0046])(S4a) and is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S5a). In this embodiment,the audio data input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1b) is convertedfrom analog data to digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2b) and isprocessed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) (S3b). The processed audiodata is stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610d (Paragraph [0047])(S4b) and is transferred to Sound Processor 205 and is output fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) via D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S5b). The sequences of S1athrough S5a and S1b through S5b are continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or by the voice recognition system (S6).

Paragraph [0054]—This Paragraph [0054] illustrates the indicator processof Communication Device 200, i.e., S2b of Paragraph [0052]. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans the video mode section of IndicatorData Storage Area 20610g (Paragraph [0049]) and retrieves the indicatordata therefrom (S1) and activates Indicator 212 (FIG. 1 and Paragraph[0042]) in accordance with the indicator data (S2). In the embodimentexplained in Paragraph [0049], Indicator 212 emits red light whileCommunication Device 200 is in the video mode and Indicator 212 turns onand off in the embodiment explained in Paragraph [0050]. The sequencesof S1 and S2 is continued until a specific signal indicating to stopsuch sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by the voicerecognition system (S3).

Paragraph [0055]—This Paragraph [0055] illustrates the sequence totransfer the video data and the audio data via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in awireless fashion. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates adialing process (S1) until the line is connected to a host (not shown)(S2). As soon as the line is connected, CPU 211 reads the video data andthe audio data stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610c (Paragraph[0046]) and Audio Data Storage Area 20610d (Paragraph [0047]) (S3) andtransfers these data to Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) where these dataare converted into a transferring data (S4). The transferring data istransferred from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion (S5). Thesequence of S1 through S5 is continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via the voice recognition system (S6). The line is disconnectedthereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0056]—This Paragraph [0056] illustrates the basic structureof the transferred data which is transferred from Communication Device200 as described in S4 and S5 of Paragraph [0055]. Transferred Data 610a is primarily composed of Header 611 a, Video Data 612 a, Audio Data613 a, Relevant Data 614 a, and Footer 615 a. Video data 612 acorresponds to the video data stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610c(Paragraph [0046]), and Audio Data 613 a corresponds to the audio datastored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610d (Paragraph [0047]). RelevantData 614 a includes various types of data, such as the identificationnumbers of Device A (i.e., the transferor device) and Device B (i.e.,the transferee device), a location data which represents the location ofDevice A, an email data transferred from Device A to Device B, etc.Header 611 a and Footer 615 a represent the beginning and the end ofTransferred Data 610 a respectively.

Paragraph [0057]—This Paragraph [0057] illustrates the data contained inRAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Device B (i.e., the transferee device). Asillustrated in Paragraph [0057], RAM 206 includes Area 269 a whichstores video data, Area 270 a which stores audio data, and Area 266 awhich is a work area utilized for the process explained hereinafter.

Paragraph [0058]—This Paragraph [0058] illustrates the software programstored in Device B. In this embodiment and Paragraph [0058], CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Device B initiates a dialing process (S1) until Device B isconnected to a host (not shown) (S2). Transferred Data 610 a is receivedby Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) of Device B (S3) and is converted by SignalProcessor 208 (FIG. 1) into data readable by CPU 211 (S4). Video dataand audio data are retrieved from Transferred Data 610 a and stored intoArea 269 a (Paragraph [0057]) and Area 270 a (Paragraph [0057]) of RAM206 respectively (S5). The video data stored in Area 269 a is processedby Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S6a). The processed video data isconverted into an analog data (S7a) and displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S8a). S7a may not be necessary depending on the type of LCD 201 used.The audio data stored in Area 270 a is processed by Sound Processor 205(FIG. 1) (S6b). The processed audio data is converted into analog databy D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S7b) and output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S8b).The sequences of S6a through S8a and S6b through S8b are continued untila specific signal indicating to stop such sequence is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via the voice recognition system (S9).

Paragraph [0059]—In this embodiment, Message MS1a is shown at the upperright corner of LCD 201 (FIG. 1) indicating that a new email has arrivedwhile video/photo mode is implemented.

Paragraph [0060]—This Paragraph [0060] illustrates the data stored inEmail Data Calculating Area 206 c (not shown) and Email Data StorageArea 206d (not shown) in order to implement the incoming messagefunction. Email Data Calculating Area 206 c includes Incoming MessageCalculating Area 206 k which stores a software program described inParagraph [0061] hereinafter, and Email Data Storage Area 206d includesMessage Data Storage Area (MS1a) 206 ma which stores the text data ofMS1a (in the present example, the text data ‘Email’).

Paragraph [0061]—This Paragraph [0061] illustrates the software programstored in Incoming Message Calculating Area 206 k (Paragraph [0060]).First of all, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checks whether a new incoming message hasarrived by scanning Email Data Storage Area 206d (Paragraph [0060])(S1). If a new message has arrived (S2), CPU 211 retrieves the text data(MS1a) from Message Data Storage Area (MS1a) 206 ma and displays on LCD201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3). The software programis executed periodically with a fixed interval.

Paragraph [0062]—In this embodiment, Message MS2a is shown on LCD 201(FIG. 1) when the video recording function is implemented, and MessageMS3a is shown when the implementation of the video recording functionhas been terminated.

Paragraph [0063]—This Paragraph [0063] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045]) todisplay messages MS2a and MS3a on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). When a startrecording signal has been input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via voice recognition system, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates therecording process, i.e., the process described in Paragraph [0053]hereinbefore (S1). During the recording process, the text data ofMessage MS2a is retrieved from Message Data Storage Area (MS2a, MS3a)20610h (Paragraph [0046]) and displayed at the upper right corner of LCD201 (FIG. 1) indicating that the video recording function is in process(S2). If the stop recording signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system indicating to stop thevideo recording process (S3), CPU 211 stops the video recording process(S4), and retrieves the text data of Message MS3a from Message DataStorage Area (MS2a, MS3a) 20610h and displays at the upper right cornerof LCD 201 for a specified period of time (S5). Since Video Data StorageArea 20610c and Audio Data Storage Area 20610d are divided into severalsectors as stated above, a plurality of software program described inParagraph [0063] can be activated to record and store a plurality ofvideo data and the corresponding audio data simultaneously.

Paragraph [0064]—This Paragraph [0064] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045]) toplayback the recorded video data and the corresponding audio data.First, a video data is selected and playback signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Once these signals are received, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates theplayback process of the recorded video data, i.e., CPU 211 retrieves theselected video data from Video Data Storage Area 20610c (Paragraph[0046]) and the corresponding audio data from Audio Data Storage Area20610d (Paragraph [0047]), and Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) processesthe channel data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). This playbackprocess continues until a stop playback signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S3). When a stopplayback signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system, CPU 211 stops the foregoing process, and retrievesthe text data of Message MS3a from Message Data Storage Area (MS2a,MS3a) 20610h (Paragraph [0046]) and displays at the upper right cornerof LCD 201 for a specified period of time (S4).

Paragraph [0065]—This Paragraph [0065] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045]).When the photo mode is selected in S2 in Paragraph [0051], the photomode is initiated and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) is ready to capture and store thephoto data in one of the areas of Photo Data Storage Area 20610e(Paragraph [0048]) (S1). Next, the photo process is initiated which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0067] (S2a) until a specific signalis input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3). The indicator process is activated simultaneously which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0069] hereinafter (S2b).

Paragraph [0066]—In this embodiment, Message MS4a is shown on LCD 201(FIG. 1) when a photo is taken with Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0067]—This Paragraph [0067] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045]) toimplement the photo mode. When a start recording signal has been inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates the recording process, i.e., retrievesan image data input from CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1), which is currentlydisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), and stores in one of the sectors of PhotoData Storage Area 20610e (Paragraph [0048]), for example Photo #1described in Paragraph [0048] (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the text data ofMessage MS4a from Message Data Storage Area (MS4a) 20610i (Paragraph[0048]) and displays at the upper right corner of LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for aspecific period of time indicating that a photo data has been taken andstored (S3). Then CPU 211 retrieves the photo data which is just storedin Photo Data Storage Area 20610e, and Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1)processes the photo data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for aspecific period of time (S4). Since Photo Data Storage Area 20610e isdivided into several sectors as stated above, S1 from S4 can be repeatedto record and store a plurality of image data.

Paragraph [0068]—This Paragraph [0068] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045]) todisplay the recorded photo data. First, a photo data is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). When this signal is received, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates thedisplay process of the recorded photo data, i.e., CPU 211 retrieves theselected photo data from Photo Data Storage Area 20610e, for examplePhoto #1 described in Paragraph [0048], and Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1)processes the selected photo data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S2). The photo data is displayed until a close signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S3). When aclose signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system, CPU 211 terminates to display the photo data (S4).

Paragraph [0069]—This Paragraph [0069] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610b (Paragraph [0045])which implements the indicator process of Communication Device 200,i.e., S2b of Paragraph [0065]. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)scans the photo mode section of Indicator Data Storage Area 20610g(Paragraph [0049]) and retrieves an indicator data therefrom (S1) andactivate Indicator 212 (FIG. 1 and Paragraph [0042]) in accordance withthe indicator data (S2). In the embodiment explained in Paragraph[0049], Indicator 212 emits green light while Communication Device 200is in the photo mode and Indicator 212 remains to be on in theembodiment explained in Paragraph [0050]. The sequence of S1 through S2is continued until a specific signal indicating to stop such sequence isinput from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by the voice recognition system(S3).

Paragraph [0070]—<<Calculator Function>>

Paragraph [0071]—Paragraph [0072] through Paragraph [0075] illustratethe calculator function of Communication Device 200. CommunicationDevice 200 can be utilized as a calculator to perform mathematicalcalculation by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0072]—This Paragraph [0072] illustrates the software programinstalled in each Communication Device 200 to initiate the presentfunction. First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2),the selected mode is activated. In the present example, thecommunication mode is activated (S3a) when the communication mode isselected in the previous step, the game download mode and the game playmode are activated (S3b) when the game download mode and the game playmode are selected in the previous step of which the details aredescribed in Paragraph [0029], and the calculator function is activated(S3c) when the calculator function is selected in the previous step. Themodes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 mayinclude all functions and modes explained in this specification. Oncethe selected mode is activated, another mode can be activated while thefirst activated mode is still implemented by going through the steps ofS1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0073]—This Paragraph [0073] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate(as described in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are described in Paragraph[0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previousparagraph) and to perform the calculator function is stored inCalculator Information Storage Area 20615a.

Paragraph [0074]—This Paragraph [0074] illustrates the data stored inCalculator Information Storage Area 20615a (Paragraph [0073]). In thisembodiment, Calculator Information Storage Area 20615a includesCalculator Software Storage Area 20615b and Calculator Data StoragesArea 20615c. Calculator Software Storage Area 20615b stores the softwareprograms to implement the present function, such as the one explained inParagraph [0075], and Calculator Data Storage Area 20615c stores aplurality of data necessary to execute the software programs stored inCalculator Software Storage Area 20615b and to implement the presentfunction.

Paragraph [0075]—This Paragraph [0075] illustrates the software programstored in Calculator Storage Area 20615b (Paragraph [0074]). In thisembodiment, one or more of numeric data are input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system as well as thearithmetic operators (e.g., ‘+’, ‘−’, and ‘x’), which are temporarilystored in Calculator Data Storage Area 20615c (S1). By utilizing thedata stored in Calculator Data Storage Area 20615c, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)performs the calculation by executing the software program stored inCalculator Software Storage Area 20615b (Paragraph [0074]) (S2). Theresult of the calculation is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter(S3).

Paragraph [0076]—<<Spreadsheet Function>>

Paragraph [0077]—Paragraph [0078] through Paragraph [0081] illustratethe spreadsheet function of Communication Device 200. Here, thespreadsheet is composed of a plurality of cells which are aligned inmatrix. In other words, the spreadsheet is divided into a plurality ofrows and columns in which alphanumeric data is capable to be input.Microsoft Excel is the typical example of the spreadsheet.

Paragraph [0078]—This Paragraph [0078] illustrates the software programinstalled in each Communication Device 200 to initiate the presentfunction. First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2),the selected mode is activated. In the present example, thecommunication mode is activated (S3a) when the communication mode isselected in the previous step, the game download mode and the game playmode are activated (S3b) when the game download mode and the game playmode are selected in the previous step of which the details aredescribed in Paragraph [0029], and the spreadsheet function is activated(S3c) when the spreadsheet function is selected in the previous step.The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3may include all functions and modes explained in this specification.Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can be activated whilethe first activated mode is still implemented by going through the stepsof S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0079]—This Paragraph [0079] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate(as described in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are described in Paragraph[0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previousparagraph) and to perform the spreadsheet function is stored inSpreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616a.

Paragraph [0080]—This Paragraph [0080] illustrates the data stored inSpreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616a (Paragraph [0079]). In thisembodiment, Spreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616a includesSpreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616b and Spreadsheet Data StorageArea 20616c. Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616b stores thesoftware programs to implement the present function, such as the oneexplained in Paragraph [0081], and Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616cstores a plurality of data necessary to execute the software programsstored in Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616b and to implement thepresent function.

Paragraph [0081]—This Paragraph [0081] illustrates the software programstored in Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616b (Paragraph [0080]).In this embodiment, a certain cell of a plurality of cells displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system. The selected cell is highlighted by acertain manner, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores the location of the selectedcell in Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616c (Paragraph [0080]) (S1).One or more of alphanumeric data are input by utilizing Input Device 210or via voice recognition system into the cell selected in S1, and CPU211 stores the alphanumeric data in Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616c(S2). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data on LCD 201 thereafter (S3).The sequence of S1 through S3 can be repeated for a numerous amount oftimes and saved and closed thereafter.

Paragraph [0082]—<<Word Processing Function>>

Paragraph [0083]—Paragraph [0084] through Paragraph [0097] illustratethe word processing function of Communication Device 200. By way ofimplementing such function, Communication Device 200 can be utilized asa word processor which has the similar functions to Microsoft Words. Theword processing function primarily includes the following functions: thebold formatting function, the italic formatting function, the imagepasting function, the font formatting function, the spell checkfunction, the underlining function, the page numbering function, and thebullets and numbering function. Here, the bold formatting function makesthe selected alphanumeric data bold. The italic formatting functionmakes the selected alphanumeric data italic. The image pasting functionpastes the selected image to a document to the selected location. Thefont formatting function changes the selected alphanumeric data to theselected font. The spell check function fixes spelling and grammaticalerrors of the alphanumeric data in the document. The underliningfunction adds underlines to the selected alphanumeric data. The pagenumbering function adds page numbers to each page of a document at theselected location. The bullets and numbering function adds the selectedtype of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphs.

Paragraph [0084]—This Paragraph [0084] illustrates the software programinstalled in each Communication Device 200 to initiate the presentfunction. First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2),the selected mode is activated. In the present example, thecommunication mode is activated (S3a) when the communication mode isselected in the previous step, the game download mode and the game playmode are activated (S3b) when the game download mode and the game playmode are selected in the previous step of which the details aredescribed in Paragraph [0029], and the word processing function isactivated (S3c) when the word processing function is selected in theprevious step. The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectablein S2 and S3 may include all functions and modes explained in thisspecification. Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can beactivated while the first activated mode is still implemented by goingthrough the steps of S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling aplurality of functions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0085]—This Paragraph [0085] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061a, the data to activate(as described in S3b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061b/2061c of which the details are described in Paragraph[0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previousparagraph) and to perform the word processing function is stored in WordProcessing Information Storage Area 20617a.

Paragraph [0086]—This Paragraph [0086] illustrates the data stored inWord Processing Information Storage Area 20617a (Paragraph [0085]). Inthis embodiment, Word Processing Information Storage Area 20617aincludes Word Processing Software Storage Area 20617b and WordProcessing Data Storage Area 20617c. Word processing Software StorageArea 20617b stores the software programs described in Paragraph [0087]hereinafter, and Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617c stores aplurality of data described in Paragraph [0088] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0087]—This Paragraph [0087] illustrates the software programsstored in Word Processing Software Storage Area 20617b (Paragraph[0086]). In this embodiment, Word Processing Software Storage Area20617b stores Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617b1, Bold FormattingSoftware 20617b2, Italic Formatting Software 20617b3, Image PastingSoftware 20617b4, Font Formatting Software 20617b5, Spell Check Software20617b6, Underlining Software 20617b7, Page Numbering Software 20617b8,and Bullets And Numbering Software 20617b9. Alphanumeric Data InputSoftware 20617b1 inputs to a document a series of alphanumeric data inaccordance to the input signals produced by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. Bold Formatting Software20617b2 implements the bold formatting function which makes the selectedalphanumeric data bold of which the sequence is described in Paragraph[0090]. Italic Formatting Software 20617b3 implements the italicformatting function which makes the selected alphanumeric data italic ofwhich the sequence is described in Paragraph [0091]. Image PastingSoftware 20617b4 implements the image pasting function which pastes theselected image to a document to the selected location of which thesequence is described in Paragraph [0092]. Font Formatting Software20617b5 implements the font formatting function which changes theselected alphanumeric data to the selected font of which the sequence isdescribed in Paragraph [0093]. Spell Check Software 20617b6 implementsthe spell check function which fixes spelling and grammatical errors ofthe alphanumeric data in a document of which the sequence is describedin Paragraph [0094]. Underlining Software 20617b7 implements theunderlining function which adds the selected underlines to the selectedalphanumeric data of which the sequence is described in Paragraph[0095]. Page Numbering Software 20617b8 implements the page numberingfunction which adds page numbers at the selected location to each pageof a document of which the sequence is described in Paragraph [0096].Bullets And Numbering Software 20617b9 implements the bullets andnumbering function which adds the selected type of bullets and numbersto the selected paragraphs of which the sequence is described inParagraph [0097].

Paragraph [0088]—This Paragraph [0088] illustrates the data stored inWord Processing Data Storage Area 20617c (Paragraph [0086]). In thisembodiment, Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617c includesAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617c1, Bold Formatting Data StorageArea 20617c2, Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617c3, Image DataStorage Area 20617c4, Font Formatting Data Storage Area 20617c5, SpellCheck Data Storage Area 20617c6, Underlining Data Storage Area 20617c7,Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617c8, and Bullets And Numbering DataStorage Area 20617c9. Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617c1 stores thebasic text and numeric data which are not decorated by bold and/oritalic (the default font may be courier new). Bold Formatting DataStorage Area 20617c2 stores the text and numeric data which aredecorated by bold. Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617c3 storesthe text and numeric data which are decorated by italic. Image DataStorage Area 20617c4 stores the data representing the location of theimage data pasted in a document and the image data itself. FontFormatting Data Storage Area 20617c5 stores a plurality of types offonts, such as arial, century, courier new, tahoma, and times new roman,of all text and numeric data stored in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20617c1. Spell check Data Storage Area 20617c6 stores a plurality ofspell check data, i.e., a plurality of correct text and numeric data forpurposes of being compared with the alphanumeric data input in adocument and a plurality of pattern data for purposes of checking thegrammatical errors therein. Underlining Data Storage Area 20617c7 storesa plurality of data representing underlines of different types. PageNumbering Data Storage Area 20617c8 stores the data representing thelocation of page numbers to be displayed in a document and the pagenumber of each page of a document. Bullets And Numbering Data StorageArea 20617c9 stores a plurality of data representing different types ofbullets and numbering and the location which they are added.

Paragraph [0089]—This Paragraph [0089] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617b1. Inthis embodiment, a plurality of alphanumeric data is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Thecorresponding alphanumeric data is retrieved from Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20617c1 (Paragraph [0088]) (S2), and the document includingthe alphanumeric data retrieved in S2 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S3).

Paragraph [0090]—This Paragraph [0090] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Bold Formatting Software 20617b2. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, abold formatting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the bold formatting data from BoldFormatting Data Storage Area 20617c2 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3), andreplaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the bold formattingdata retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replaced boldformatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0091]—This Paragraph [0091] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Italic Formatting Software 20617b3. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, anitalic formatting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the italic formatting data fromItalic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617c3 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3), andreplaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the italic formattingdata retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replaced italicformatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0092]—This Paragraph [0092] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Image Pasting Software 20617b4. In thisembodiment, the image to be pasted is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Here, the image maybe of any type, such as JPEG, GIF, and TIFF. Next the location in adocument where the image is to be pasted is selected by utilizing InputDevice 210 or via voice recognition system (S2). The data representingthe location is stored in Image Pasting Data Storage Area 20617c4(Paragraph [0088]). The image is pasted at the location selected in S2and the image is stored in Image Pasting Data Storage Area 20617c4 (S3).The document with the pasted image is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0093]—This Paragraph [0093] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Font Formatting Software 20617b5. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, afont formatting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the font formatting data fromItalic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617c5 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3), andreplaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the font formattingdata retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replaced fontformatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0094]—This Paragraph [0094] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Spell Check Software 20617b6. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans all alphanumeric data in a document(S1). CPU 211 then compares the alphanumeric data with the spell checkdata stored in Spell Check Data Storage Area 20617c6 (Paragraph [0088]),i.e., a plurality of correct text and numeric data for purposes of beingcompared with the alphanumeric data input in a document and a pluralityof pattern data for purposes of checking the grammatical errors therein(S2). CPU 211 corrects the alphanumeric data and/or corrects thegrammatical errors (S3), and the document with the correctedalphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4).

Paragraph [0095]—This Paragraph [0095] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Underlining Software 20617b7. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, anunderlining signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system toselect the type of the underline to be added (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenretrieves the underlining data from Underlining Data Storage Area20617c7 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3), and adds to the alphanumeric dataselected in S1 (S4). The document with underlines added to the selectedalphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0096]—This Paragraph [0096] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Page Numbering Software 20617b8. In thisembodiment, a page numbering signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, the location todisplay the page number is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then stores the locationof the page number to be displayed in Page Numbering Storage Area20617c8 (Paragraph [0088]), and adds the page number to each page of adocument at the selected location (S3). The document with page numbersis displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0097]—This Paragraph [0097] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Bullets And Numbering Software 20617b9. Inthis embodiment, a paragraph is selected by utilizing input device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, the type of thebullets and/or numbering is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then stores theidentification data of the paragraph selected in S1 and the type of thebullets and/or numbering in Bullets And Numbering Data Storage Area20617c9 (Paragraph [0088]), and adds the bullets and/or numbering to theselected paragraph of a document (S3). The document with the bulletsand/or numbering is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0098]—<<Start Up Software Function>>

Paragraph [0099]—Paragraph [0100] through Paragraph [0109] illustratethe start up software program function which enables CommunicationDevice 200 to automatically activate (or start up) the registeredsoftware programs when the power is on.

Paragraph [0100]—This Paragraph [0100] illustrates the overall sequenceof the present function. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 presses the power button of Communication Device 200 (S1).Then the predetermined software programs automatically activate (orstart up) without having any instructions from the user of CommunicationDevice 200 (S2).

Paragraph [0101]—This Paragraph [0101] illustrates the storage areaincluded RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Start UpInformation Storage Area 20621a which is described in Paragraph [0102]hereinafter.

Paragraph [0102]—This Paragraph [0102] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Start Up Information Storage Area 20621a (Paragraph [0101]).In this embodiment, Start Up Information Storage Area 20621a includesStart Up Software Storage Area 20621b and Start Up Data Storage Area20621c. Start Up Software Storage Area 20621b stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0103] hereinafter. Start Up Data Storage Area20621c stores the data necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described in Paragraph [0105] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0103]—This Paragraph [0103] illustrates the software programsstored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621b (Paragraph [0102]). Inthis embodiment, Start Up Software Storage Area 20621b stores Power OnDetecting Software 20621b1, Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software20621b2, and Start Up Software Activating Software 20621b3. Power OnDetecting Software 20621b1 detects whether the power of CommunicationDevice 200 is on of which the sequence is described in Paragraph [0106]hereinafter, Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software 20621b2identifies the software programs which are automatically activated ofwhich the sequence is described in Paragraph [0107] hereinafter, andStart Up Software Activating Software 20621b3 activates the identifiedsoftware programs identified by Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621b2 of which the sequence is described in Paragraph [0108]hereinafter.

Paragraph [0104]—This Paragraph [0104] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Start Up Data Storage Area 20621c (Paragraph [0102]). Inthis embodiment, Start Up Data Storage Area 20621c includes Start UpSoftware Index Storage Area 20621c1. Here, Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621c1 stores the software program indexes, wherein asoftware program index is an unique information assigned to eachsoftware program as an identifier (e.g., title of a software program) ofwhich the details are explained in Paragraph [0105] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0105]—This Paragraph [0105] illustrates the data stored inStart Up Software Index Storage Area 20621c1 (Paragraph [0104]). In thisembodiment, Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621c1 stores thesoftware program indexes of the software programs which areautomatically activated by the present function. Here, the softwareprograms may be any software programs explained in this specification,and the storage areas where these software programs are stored areexplained in the relevant paragraphs thereto. Three software programindexes, i.e., Start Up Software Index 20621c1a, Start Up Software Index20621c1b, and Start Up Software Index 20621c1c, are stored in Start UpSoftware Index Storage Area 20621c1 in the present example. The softwareprogram indexes can be created and store in Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621c1 manually by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system.

Paragraph [0106]—This Paragraph [0106] illustrates the sequence of PowerOn Detecting Software 20621b1 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area20621b (Paragraph [0103]). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checksthe status of the power condition of Communication Device 200 (S1). Whenthe user of Communication Device 200 powers on Communication Device 200by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such as by pressing a powerbutton (S2), CPU 211 activates Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621b2 (Paragraph [0103]) of which the sequence is explainedin Paragraph [0107] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0107]—This Paragraph [0107] illustrates the sequence of StartUp Data Storage Area Scanning Software 20621b2 stored in Start UpSoftware Storage Area 20621b (Paragraph [0103]). In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621c1(Paragraph [0105]) (S1), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S2). CPU 211 activates Start Up SoftwareActivating Software 20621b3 (Paragraph [0103]) thereafter of which thesequence is explained in Paragraph [0108] hereinafter (S3).

Paragraph [0108]—This Paragraph [0108] illustrates the sequence of StartUp Software Activating Software 20621b3 stored in Start Up SoftwareStorage Area 20621b (Paragraph [0103]). In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) activates the software programs of which the software programindexes are identified in S2 of Paragraph [0107] hereinbefore (S1).

Paragraph [0109]—This Paragraph [0109] illustrates another embodimentwherein the three software programs stored in Start Up Software StorageArea 20621b (Paragraph [0103]) (i.e., Power On Detecting Software20621b1, Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software 20621b2, Start UpSoftware Activating Software 20621b3) is integrated into one softwareprogram stored therein. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checks thestatus of the power condition of Communication Device 200 (S1). When theuser of Communication Device 200 powers on Communication Device 200 byutilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such as by pressing a power button(S2), CPU 211 scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621c1(Paragraph [0104]) (S3), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S4). CPU 211 activates the software programsthereafter of which the software program indexes are identified in S4(S5).

Paragraph [0110]—As another embodiment, the software programs per se(not the software program indexes as described in Paragraph [0105]) maybe stored in a specific storage area which are activated by the presentfunction.

Paragraph [0111]—As another embodiment, the present function may beimplemented at the time the user of Communication Device 200 logs oninstead of at the time the Communication Device 200 is powered asdescribed in S2 of Paragraph [0106].

Paragraph [0112]—<<Stereo Audio Data Output Function>>

Paragraph [0113]—Paragraph [0114] through Paragraph [0126] illustratethe stereo audio data output function which enables Communication Device200 to output audio data from Speakers 216L and 216R (not shown) in astereo fashion.

Paragraph [0114]—This Paragraph [0114] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host Data Storage Area H00c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]). Inthis embodiment, Host Data Storage Area H00c includes Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22a. Stereo Audio Information Storage AreaH22a stores the software programs and data necessary to implement thepresent function as described in details hereinafter.

Paragraph [0115]—This Paragraph [0115] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Audio Information Storage Area H22a (Paragraph[0114]). In this embodiment, Stereo Audio Information Storage Area H22aincludes Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22b and Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22c. Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22b stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function, such asthe one described in Paragraph [0118] hereinafter. Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22c stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0116] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0116]—This Paragraph [0116] illustrates the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22c (Paragraph [0115]). Aplurality of stereo audio data are stored in Stereo Audio Data StorageArea H22c. In the example described in Paragraph [0116], three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data H22c1, Stereo Audio Data H22c2, andStereo Audio Data H22c3 are stored therein.

Paragraph [0117]—This Paragraph [0117] illustrates the components of thestereo audio data stored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22c(Paragraph [0116]). This Paragraph describes the components of StereoAudio Data H22c1 (Paragraph [0116]) as an example. In this embodiment,Stereo Audio Data H22c1 includes Left Speaker Audio Data H22c1L, RightSpeaker Audio Data H22c1R, and Stereo Audio Data Output Timing DataH22c1T. Left Speaker Audio Data H22c1L is an audio data which isdesigned to be output from Speaker 216L (not shown). Right Speaker AudioData H22c1R is an audio data which is designed to be output from Speaker216R (not shown). Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data H22c1T is atiming data which is utilized to synchronize the output of both LeftSpeaker Audio Data H22c1L and Right Speaker Audio Data H22c1R fromSpeaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

Paragraph [0118]—This Paragraph [0118] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22b(Paragraph [0115]). In this embodiment, the software program stored inStereo Audio Software Storage Area H22b extracts one of the stereo audiodata stored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22c (Paragraph [0116])and creates Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD for purposes oftransferring the extracted stereo audio data to Communication Device 200(S1).

Paragraph [0119]—This Paragraph [0119] illustrates the components ofTransferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD created by the software programstored in Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22b (Paragraph [0118]). Inthis embodiment, Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD is composed ofHeader TSAD1, Com Device ID TSAD2, Host ID TSAD3, Transferred StereoAudio Data TSAD4, and Footer TSAD5. Com Device ID TSAD2 indicates theidentification of Communication Device 200, Host ID TSAD3 indicates theidentification of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), and Transferred StereoAudio Data TSAD4 is the stereo audio data extracted in the mannerdescribed in Paragraph [0118]. Header TSAD1 and Footer TSAD5 indicatethe beginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD.

Paragraph [0120]—This Paragraph [0120] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 (Paragraph[0025]). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Stereo Audio InformationStorage Area 20622a. Stereo Audio Information Storage Area 20622a storesthe software programs and data necessary to implement the presentfunction as described in details hereinafter.

Paragraph [0121]—This Paragraph [0121] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Audio Information Storage Area 20622a (Paragraph[0120]). In this embodiment, Stereo Audio Information Storage Area20622a includes Stereo Audio Software Storage Area 20622b and StereoAudio Data Storage Area 20622c. Stereo Audio Software Storage Area20622b stores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0125] and Paragraph[0126] hereinafter. Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0122] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0122]—This Paragraph [0122] illustrates the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c (Paragraph [0121]). Aplurality of stereo audio data are stored in Stereo Audio Data StorageArea 20622c. In the example described in Paragraph [0122], three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data 20622c1, Stereo Audio Data 20622c2,and Stereo Audio Data 20622c3 are stored therein.

Paragraph [0123]—This Paragraph [0123] illustrates the components of thestereo audio data stored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c(Paragraph [0122]). Paragraph describes the components of Stereo AudioData 20622c1 (Paragraph [0122]) as an example. In this embodiment,Stereo Audio Data 20622c1 includes Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c1L,Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1R, and Stereo Audio Data Output TimingData 20622c1T. Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c1L is an audio data whichis designed to be output from Speaker 216L (not shown). Right SpeakerAudio Data 20622c1R is an audio data which is designed to be output fromSpeaker 216R (not shown). Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data 20622c1Tis a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the output of bothLeft Speaker Audio Data 20622c1L and Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1Rfrom Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

Paragraph [0124]—The downloaded stereo audio data are stored in specificarea(s) of Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c (Paragraph [0122]).

Paragraph [0125]—This Paragraph [0125] illustrates the sequence ofselecting and preparing to output the stereo audio data from Speakers216L and 216R (not shown) in a stereo fashion. In this embodiment, alist of stereo audio data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Theuser of Communication Device 200 selects one stereo audio data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). Assuming Stereo Audio Data 20622c1 is selected (Paragraph [0122])in S2, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c1L (S3),Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1R (S4), and Stereo Audio Data OutputTiming Data 20622c1T from Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622c(Paragraph [0122]) (S5).

Paragraph [0126]—This Paragraph [0126] illustrates the sequence ofoutputting the stereo audio data from Speakers 216L and 216R (not shown)in a stereo fashion. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 inputs a specific signal to output the stereo audio data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Assuming Audio Data 20622c1 (Paragraph [0122]) is selected in S2of Paragraph [0125], CPU 211 outputs Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c1L(Paragraph [0123]) and Right Speaker Audio Data 20622c1R (Paragraph[0123]) from Speakers 216L and 216R respectively in a stereo fashion inaccordance with Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data 20622c1T (Paragraph[0123]) (S2).

Paragraph [0127]—<<Stereo Visual Data Output Function>>

Paragraph [0128]—Paragraph [0129] through Paragraph [0141] illustratethe stereo visual data output function which enables CommunicationDevice 200 to output visual data from LCDs 201L and 201R (not shown) ina stereo fashion.

Paragraph [0129]—This Paragraph [0129] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host Data Storage Area H00c (not shown) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]). In this embodiment, Host Data Storage Area H00c includes StereoVisual Information Storage Area H23a. Stereo Visual Information StorageArea H23a stores the software programs and data necessary to implementthe present function as described in details hereinafter.

Paragraph [0130]—This Paragraph [0130] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Visual Information Storage Area H23a (Paragraph[0129]). In this embodiment, Stereo Visual Information Storage Area H23aincludes Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23b and Stereo Visual DataStorage Area H23c. Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23b stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function, such asthe one described in Paragraph [0133] hereinafter. Stereo Visual DataStorage Area H23c stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0131] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0131]—This Paragraph [0131] illustrates the stereo visualdata stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23c (Paragraph [0130]).A plurality of stereo visual data are stored in Stereo Visual DataStorage Area H23c. In the example described in Paragraph [0131], threestereo visual data, i.e., Stereo Visual Data H23c1, Stereo Visual DataH23c2, and Stereo Visual Data H23c3 are stored therein.

Paragraph [0132]—This Paragraph [0132] illustrates the components of thestereo visual data stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23c(Paragraph [0131]). Paragraph [0132] describes the components of StereoVisual Data H23c1 (Paragraph [0131]) as an example. In this embodiment,Stereo Visual Data H23c1 includes Left LCD Visual Data H23c1L, Right LCDVisual Data H23c1R, and Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data H23c1T.Left LCD Visual Data H23c1L is a visual data which is designed to beoutput from LCD 201L (not shown). Right LCD Visual Data H23c1R is avisual data which is designed to be output from LCD 201R (not shown).Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data H23c1T is a timing data which isutilized to synchronize the output of both Left LCD Visual Data H23c1Land Right LCD Visual Data H23c1R from LCD 201R and LCD 201Lrespectively.

Paragraph [0133]—This Paragraph [0133] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23b(Paragraph [0130]). In this embodiment, the software program stored inStereo Visual Software Storage Area H23b extracts one of the stereovisual data stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23c (Paragraph[0131]) and creates Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD for purposes oftransferring the extracted stereo visual data to Communication Device200 (S1).

Paragraph [0134]—This Paragraph [0134] illustrates the components ofTransferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD created by the software programstored in Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23b (Paragraph [0133]).In this embodiment, Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD is composed ofHeader TSVD1, Com Device ID TSVD2, Host ID TSVD3, Transferred StereoVisual Data TSVD4, and Footer TSVD5. Com Device ID TSVD2 indicates theidentification of Communication Device 200, Host ID TSVD3 indicates theidentification of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), and Transferred StereoVisual Data TSVD4 is the stereo visual data extracted in the mannerdescribed in Paragraph [0133]. Header TSVD1 and Footer TSVD5 indicatethe beginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD.

Paragraph [0135]—This Paragraph [0135] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 (Paragraph[0025]). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Stereo Visual InformationStorage Area 20623a. Stereo Visual Information Storage Area 20623astores the software programs and data necessary to implement the presentfunction as described in details hereinafter.

Paragraph [0136]—This Paragraph [0136] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Visual Information Storage Area 20623a (Paragraph[0135]). In this embodiment, Stereo Visual Information Storage Area20623a includes Stereo Visual Software Storage Area 20623b and StereoVisual Data Storage Area 20623c. Stereo Visual Software Storage Area20623b stores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0140] and Paragraph[0141] hereinafter. Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0137] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0137]—This Paragraph [0137] illustrates the stereo visualdata stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c (Paragraph[0136]). A plurality of stereo visual data are stored in Stereo VisualData Storage Area 20623c. In the example described in Paragraph [0137],three stereo visual data, i.e., Stereo Visual Data 20623c1, StereoVisual Data 20623c2, and Stereo Visual Data 20623c3 are stored therein.

Paragraph [0138]—This Paragraph [0138] illustrates the components of thestereo visual data stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c(Paragraph [0137]). Paragraph describes the components of Stereo VisualData 20623c1 (Paragraph [0137]) as an example. In this embodiment,Stereo Visual Data 20623c1 includes Left LCD Visual Data 20623c1L, RightLCD Visual Data 20623c1R, and Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data20623c1T. Left LCD Visual Data 20623c1L is a visual data which isdesigned to be output from LCD 201L (not shown). Right LCD Visual Data20623c1R is a visual data which is designed to be output from LCD 201R(not shown). Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data 20623c1T is a timingdata which is utilized to synchronize the output of both Left LCD VisualData 20623c1L and Right LCD Visual Data 20623c1R from LCD 201R and LCD201L respectively.

Paragraph [0139]—The downloaded stereo visual data are stored inspecific area(s) of Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c (Paragraph[0137]).

Paragraph [0140]—This Paragraph [0140] illustrates the sequence ofselecting and preparing to output the stereo visual data from LCDs 201Land 201R (not shown) in a stereo fashion. In this embodiment, a list ofstereo visual data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one stereo visual data by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). AssumingStereo Visual Data 20623c1 is selected (Paragraph [0137]) in S2, CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves Left LCD Visual Data 20623c1L (S3), Right LCD VisualData 20623c1R (S4), and Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data 20623c1Tfrom Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623c (Paragraph [0137]) (S5).

Paragraph [0141]—This Paragraph [0141] illustrates the sequence ofoutputting the stereo visual data from LCDs 201L and 201R (not shown) ina stereo fashion. In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device200 inputs a specific signal to output the stereo visual data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Assuming Visual Data 20623c1 (Paragraph [0137]) is selected in S2of Paragraph [0140], CPU 211 outputs Left LCD Visual Data 20623c1L(Paragraph [0138]) and Right LCD Visual Data 20623c1R (Paragraph [0138])from LCDs 201L and 201R respectively in a stereo fashion in accordancewith Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data 20623c1T (Paragraph [0138])(S2).

Paragraph [0142]—<<SOS Calling Function>>

Paragraph [0143]—Paragraph [0144] through Paragraph [0156] illustratethe SOS calling function which enables Communication Device 200 tonotify the police department the current location of CommunicationDevice 200 and the personal information of the user of Communication 200when a 911 call is dialed from Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0144]—This Paragraph [0144] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host Information Storage Area H00a (Paragraph [0025]). Inthis embodiment, Host Information Storage Area H00a includes SOS CallingInformation Storage Area H29a of which the data stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0145].

Paragraph [0145]—This Paragraph [0145] illustrates the storage areasincluded in SOS Calling Information Storage Area H29a (Paragraph[0144]). In this embodiment, SOS Calling Information Storage Area H29aincludes SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29b and SOS Calling SoftwareStorage Area H29c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0146] and Paragraph [0147]. SOS Calling Software StorageArea H29c stores the software programs necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0155] andParagraph [0156].

Paragraph [0146]—This Paragraph [0146] illustrates the storage areaincluded in SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29b (Paragraph [0145]). Inthis embodiment, SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29b includes PoliceDepartment Location Data Storage Area H29b1 of which the data storedtherein are described in Paragraph [0147].

Paragraph [0147]—This Paragraph [0147] illustrates the data stored inPolice Department Location Data Storage Area H29b1 (Paragraph [0146]).As illustrated in Paragraph [0147], Police Department Location DataStorage Area H29b1 includes three columns, i.e., Police Dept ID,Location Data, and Phone #. Police Dept ID represents the identificationof a police department (e.g., NYPD). Location Data represents thegeographical location data (in x, y, z format) of the police departmentof the corresponding Police Dept ID. Phone # represents the phone numberof the police department of the corresponding Police Dept ID. In theexample described in Paragraph [0147], H29PD #1 is an identification ofthe police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #1 andof which the phone number is H29PN #1; H29PD #2 is an identification ofthe police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #2 andof which the phone number is H29PN #2; H29PD #3 is an identification ofthe police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #3 andof which the phone number is H29PN #3; and H29PD #4 is an identificationof the police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #4and of which the phone number is H29PN #4.

Paragraph [0148]—The data and/or the software programs necessary toimplement the present function on the side of Communication Device 200as described hereinafter may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph[0025]) to Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0149]—This Paragraph [0149] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, RAM 206 includes SOS Calling Information Storage Area 20629aof which the details are described in Paragraph [0150].

Paragraph [0150]—This Paragraph [0150] illustrates the storage areasincluded in SOS Calling Information Storage Area 20629a (Paragraph[0149]). In this embodiment, SOS Calling Information Storage Area 20629aincludes SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629b and SOS Calling SoftwareStorage Area 20629c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629b includes datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0151] and Paragraph [0152]. SOS Calling Software StorageArea 20629c stores the software programs necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the one described in Paragraph [0153].

Paragraph [0151]—This Paragraph [0151] illustrates storage areasincluded in SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629b (Paragraph [0150]). Inthis embodiment, SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629b includes GPS DataStorage Area 20629b1 and User Data Storage Area 20629b2. GPS DataStorage Area 20629b1 stores the data regarding the current geographicallocation produced by the method so-called GPS as described hereinbefore.User Data Storage Area 20629b2 stores the data regarding the personalinformation of the user of Communication Device 200 as described inParagraph [0152].

Paragraph [0152]—This Paragraph [0152] illustrates the data stored inUser Data Storage Area 20629b2 (Paragraph [0151]). In this embodiment,User Data Storage Area 20629b2 includes User Data 20629UD which includesdata regarding the personal information of the user of CommunicationDevice 200. In the example described in Paragraph [0152], User Data20629UD comprises Name, Age, Sex, Race, Blood Type, Home Address, andSSN. Name represents the name of the user of Communication Device 200;Age represents the age of the user of Communication Device 200; Sexrepresents the sex of the user of Communication Device 200; Racerepresents the race of the user of Communication Device 200; Blood Typerepresents the blood type of the user of Communication Device 200; HomeAddress represents the home address of the user of Communication Device200; and SSN represents the social security number of the user ofCommunication Device 200.

Paragraph [0153]—This Paragraph [0153] illustrates the software programstored in SOS Calling Software Storage Area 20629c (Paragraph [0150]).In this embodiment, when the user of Communication Device 200 inputs 911by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) calculates the GPS data, i.e., the currentgeographical location data by utilizing the method so-called GPS asdescribed hereinbefore (S2), and stores the GPS data in GPS Data StorageArea 20629b1 (Paragraph [0151]) (S3). CPU 211 then retrieves User Data20629UD from User Data Storage Area 20629b2 (Paragraph [0152]) and theGPS data from GPS Data Storage Area 20629b1 (Paragraph [0151]) (S4), andcomposes SOS Data 20629SOS therefrom (S5), which is sent thereafter toHost H (Paragraph [0025]) (S6).

Paragraph [0154]—This Paragraph [0154] illustrates the elements of SOSData 20629SOS (Paragraph [0153]). In this embodiment, SOS Data 20629SOScomprises Connection Request 20629CR, GPS Data 20629GD, and User Data20629UD. Connection Request 20629CR represents a request to Host H(Paragraph [0025]) to forward the 911 call to a police department. GPSData 20629GD is a data retrieved from GPS Data Storage Area 20629b1(Paragraph [0152]) as described in S4 of Paragraph [0153]. User Data20629UD is a data retrieved from User Data Storage Area 20629b2(Paragraph [0152]) as described in S4 of Paragraph [0153].

Paragraph [0155]—This Paragraph [0155] illustrates the software programstored in SOS Calling Software Storage Area H29c (Paragraph [0145]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host H periodicallychecks the incoming call (S1). If the incoming call is SOS Data 20629SOS(Paragraph [0154]) (S2), Host H initiates the SOS calling process asdescribed in Paragraph [0156] (S3).

Paragraph [0156]—This Paragraph [0156] illustrates the software programstored in SOS Calling Software Storage Area H29c (Paragraph [0145]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host H retrieves GPS Data20629GD from SOS Data 20629SOS (Paragraph [0154]) (S1), and selects theclosest police department by comparing GPS Data 20629GD and the datastored in column Location Data of Police Department Location DataStorage Area H29b1 (Paragraph [0147]) of Host H (S2). Host H thenretrieves the corresponding phone number stored in column Phone # andconnects the line between the corresponding police department andCommunication Device 200 in order to initiate a voice communicationtherebetween (S3). Host H forwards to the police department thereafterGPS Data 20629GD and User Data 20629UD retrieved in S1 (S4).

Paragraph [0157]—As another embodiment, User Data 20629UD stored in UserData Storage Area 20629b2 (Paragraph [0152]) may be stored in SOSCalling Data Storage Area H29b (Paragraph [0145]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]). In this embodiment, SOS Data 20629SOS (Paragraph [0153])primarily comprises Connection Request 20629CR and GPS Data 20629GD, andUser Data 20629UD is retrieved from SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29bof Host H, which is sent to the police department in S4 of Paragraph[0156].

Paragraph [0158]—<<Game Vibrating Function>>

Paragraph [0159]—Paragraph [0160] through Paragraph [0162] illustratethe game vibrating function which vibrates Communication Device 200 whena predetermined condition is met while Communication Device 200 isexecuting a video game software program.

Paragraph [0160]—This Paragraph [0160] illustrates another embodiment ofthe software program stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061d(Paragraph [0033]) to implement the shooting video game function (notshown). When hit program is initiated (i.e., when User Controlled ObjectUCO (not shown) is hit by CPU Fired Bullet CFB (not shown)), CPU 211(FIG. 1), first of all, activates Vibrator 217 (FIG. 1) (S1). Then CPU211 displays an explosion image on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) by reading thethree-dimensional data of CPU Fired Bullet CFB from 3D Object DataStorage Area 2061e (Paragraph [0033]) and by ‘pasting’ the relevanttextures thereto stored in Texture Data Storage Area 2061f (Paragraph[0033]) (S2). Next, CPU 211 erases the image of User Controlled ObjectUCO from LCD 201 (S3), and also the explosion image (S4), and CPU 211deactivates Vibrator 217 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0161]—This Paragraph [0161] illustrates another embodiment ofthe software program stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061d(Paragraph [0033]) to implement the driving game function (not shown).In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) performs the user controlled carprocess (S1), the CPU controlled car process for all CPU Controlled CarCCCs (not shown) displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2), the street imageprocess (S3), and the background image process (S4). Further, CPU 211performs the vibrator controlling process which is described inParagraph [0162] (S5).

Paragraph [0162]—This Paragraph [0162] illustrates the vibratorcontrolling process described in S5 of Paragraph [0161]. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodically checks the position of UserControlled Car UCC (not shown) (S1). If User Controlled Car UCC is offthe street or driving on a street of a bad condition (S2), CPU 211activates Vibrator 217 (FIG. 1) (S3). For purposes of implementing thepresent function to driving video game, CPU 211 periodically checks theposition of User Controlled Car UCC. CPU 211 also periodically checksthe street condition by retrieving the data regarding the streetcondition from Street Parameter Storage Area 2061g2 (not shown).

Paragraph [0163]—<<Digital Camera Function>>

Paragraph [0164]—Paragraph [0165] through Paragraph [0184] illustratethe digital camera function which enables Communication Device 200 totake digital photos by utilizing CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0165]—This Paragraph [0165] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesDigital Camera Information Storage Area 20646a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described in Paragraph [0167].

Paragraph [0166]—The data and software programs stored in Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646a (Paragraph [0165]) may be downloadedfrom Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0167]—This Paragraph [0167] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Digital Camera Information Storage Area 20646a (Paragraph[0165]). In this embodiment, Digital Camera Information Storage Area20646a includes Digital Camera Data Storage Area 20646b and DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646c. Digital Camera Data Storage Area20646b stores the data necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described in Paragraph through Paragraph [0170]. DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0171].

Paragraph [0168]—This Paragraph [0168] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Digital Camera Data Storage Area 20646b (Paragraph [0167]).In this embodiment, Digital Camera Data Storage Area 20646b includesPhoto Data Storage Area 20646b1 and Digital Camera Function Data StorageArea 20646b2. Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 stores the data describedin Paragraph [0169]. Digital Camera Function Data Storage Area 20646b2stores the data stored in Paragraph [0170].

Paragraph [0169]—This Paragraph [0169] illustrates the data stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646b1 (Paragraph [0168]). In this embodiment,Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Photo ID’and ‘Photo Data’. Column ‘Photo ID’ stores the identifications of thephoto data, and column ‘Photo Data’ stores a plurality of photo datataken by implementing the present function. In this embodiment, PhotoData Storage Area 20646b1 stores the following data: ‘Photo ID’ Photo #1of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD1; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #2 of which the‘Photo Data’ is 46PD2; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #3 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is46PD3; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #4 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD4; and‘Photo ID’ Photo #5 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD5.

Paragraph [0170]—This Paragraph [0170] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Digital Camera Function Data Storage Area 20646b2 (Paragraph[0168]). In this embodiment, Digital Camera Function Data Storage Area20646b2 includes Quality Data Storage Area 20646b2a, Multiple PhotoShooting Number Data Storage Area 20646b2b, and Strobe Data Storage Area20646b2c. Quality Data Storage Area 20646b2a stores the data selected inS2 of Paragraph [0173]. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Data Storage Area20646b2b stores the data selected in S2 of Paragraph [0174]. Strobe DataStorage Area 20646b2c stores the data selected in S2 of Paragraph[0175].

Paragraph [0171]—This Paragraph [0171] illustrates the software programsstored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c (Paragraph[0167]). In this embodiment, Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646cstores Quality Selecting Software 20646c1, Multiple Photo ShootingSoftware 20646c2, Trimming Software 20646c3, Digital Zooming Software20646c4, Strobe Software 20646c5, Digital Camera Function SelectingSoftware 20646c6, Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software20646c7, Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646c8, Photo Data ShootingSoftware 20646c9, and Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646c10. QualitySelecting Software 20646c1 is the software program described inParagraph [0173]. Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646c2 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0177]. Trimming Software20646c3 is the software program described in Paragraph [0184]. DigitalZooming Software 20646c4 is the software program described in Paragraph[0181]. Strobe Software 20646c5 is the software program described inParagraph [0178]. Digital Camera Function Selecting Software 20646c6 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0172]. Multiple PhotoShooting Number Selecting Software 20646c7 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0174]. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646c8is the software program described in Paragraph [0175]. Photo DataShooting Software 20646c9 is the software program described in Paragraph[0176].

Paragraph [0172]—This Paragraph [0172] illustrates Digital CameraFunction Selecting Software 20646c6 stored in Digital Camera SoftwareStorage Area 20646c (Paragraph [0171]) which administers the overallflow of displaying the functions and selecting the option for eachfunction. In this embodiment, a list of functions is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The items displayed on LCD 201 are ‘Quality’,‘Multiple Photo’, and ‘Strobe’. A function is selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2), and therelevant software program is activated thereafter (S3). In the presentembodiment, Quality Selecting Software 20646c1 described in Paragraph[0173] is activated when ‘Quality’ displayed on LCD 201 is selected inS2. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software 20646c7 describedin Paragraph [0174] is activated when ‘Multiple Photo’ is selected inS2. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646c8 described in Paragraph[0175] is activated when ‘Strobe’ is selected in S2.

Paragraph [0173]—This Paragraph [0173] illustrates Quality SelectingSoftware 20646c1 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c(Paragraph [0171]) which selects the quality of the photo data taken byimplementing the present function. In this embodiment, a list of optionsis displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed on LCD 201are ‘High’, ‘STD’, and ‘Low’ in the present embodiment. One of theoptions is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2). The resolution of the photo data taken is highif ‘High’ is selected; the resolution of the photo taken is standard if‘STD’ is selected; and the resolution of the photo taken is low if ‘Low’is selected. The selected option is stored as the quality data inQuality Data Storage Area 20646b2a (Paragraph [0170]) (S3).

Paragraph [0174]—This Paragraph [0174] illustrates Multiple PhotoShooting Number Selecting Software 20646c7 stored in Digital CameraSoftware Storage Area 20646c (Paragraph [0171]) which selects the numberof photos taken by a single photo shooting signal. In this embodiment, alist of options is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The optionsdisplayed on LCD 201 are figures from ‘1’ through ‘10’. Only one photois taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘1’ is selected; two photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘2’ is selected; three photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘3’ is selected; four photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘4’ is selected; five photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘5’ is selected; six photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘6’ is selected; seven photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘7’ is selected; eight photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘8’ is selected; nine photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘9’ is selected; and ten photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘10’ is selected. A digit from ‘1’through ‘10’ is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S2). The selected digital is stored as themultiple photo shooting number data in Multiple Photo Shooting NumberData Storage Area 20646b2b (Paragraph [0170]) (S3).

Paragraph [0175]—This Paragraph [0175] illustrates Strobe On/OffSelecting Software 20646c8 stored in Digital Camera Software StorageArea 20646c (Paragraph [0171]) which selects Flash Light Unit 220 (notshown) to be activated or not when a photo is taken. In this embodiment,a list of options is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The optionsdisplayed on LCD 201 are ‘On’ and ‘Off’. Flash Light Unit 220 isactivated at the time photo is taken if ‘On’ is selected; and FlashLight Unit 220 is not activated at the time photo is taken if ‘Off’ isselected. One of the two options is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). The selected optionis stored as the strobe data in Strobe Data Storage Area 20646b2c(Paragraph [0170]) (S3).

Paragraph [0176]—This Paragraph [0176] illustrates Photo Data ShootingSoftware 20646c9 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c(Paragraph [0171]) which takes photo(s) in accordance with the optionsselected in Paragraph [0173]. In this embodiment, a photo shootingsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Here, the photo shooting signal indicates CPU211 (FIG. 1) to input photo data to CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) and store thedata in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 (Paragraph [0169]). CPU 211 thenretrieves the quality data from Quality Data Storage Area 20646b2a(Paragraph [0170]) (S2). The photo data is input via CCD Unit 214 (S3),and the data is stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 (Paragraph[0169]) with new photo ID in accordance with the quality data retrievedin S2 (S4).

Paragraph [0177]—This Paragraph [0177] illustrates Multiple PhotoShooting Software 20646c2 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area20646c (Paragraph [0171]) which takes photo(s) in accordance with theoptions selected in Paragraph [0174]. In this embodiment, a photoshooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the multiplephoto shooting number data from Multiple Photo Shooting Number DataStorage Area 20646b2b (Paragraph [0170]) (S2). CPU 211 then takes photosin accordance with the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 (S3). Namely, only one photo is taken by a photo shooting signal ifthe multiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘1’; twophotos are taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photoshooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘2’; three photos are taken by aphoto shooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number dataretrieved in S2 is ‘3’; four photos are taken by a photo shooting signalif the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘4’; fivephotos are taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photoshooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘5’; six photos are taken by aphoto shooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number dataretrieved in S2 is ‘6’; seven photos are taken by a photo shootingsignal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is‘7’; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiplephoto shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘8’; nine photos are takenby a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number dataretrieved in S2 is ‘9’; and ten photos are taken by a photo shootingsignal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is‘10’.

Paragraph [0178]—This Paragraph [0178] illustrates Strobe Software20646c5 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c (Paragraph[0171]) which takes photo(s) in accordance with the options selected inParagraph [0175]. In this embodiment, a photo shooting signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the strobe data from Strobe DataStorage Area 20646b2c (Paragraph [0170]) (S2). If the strobe data is‘On’ (S3), CPU 211 activates Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown) each timea photo is taken (S4). In other words, Strobe Software 20646c5 isharmonized with Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646c2 described inParagraph [0177]. Namely, Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for one timeif one photo is taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash LightUnit 220 is activated for two times if two photos are taken by a singlephoto shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for three timesif three photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash LightUnit 220 is activated for four times if four photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for fivetimes if five photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. FlashLight Unit 220 is activated for six times if six photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated forseven times if seven photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for eight times if eight photos aretaken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 isactivated for nine times if nine photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for ten times if tenphotos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.

Paragraph [0179]—This Paragraph [0179] illustrates one embodiment of thezooming function which zooms the photo data stored in Photo Data StorageArea 20646b1 (Paragraph [0169]). In this embodiment, a certain photoselected by the user of Communication Device 200 is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1). Assuming that the user intends to zoom Object 20646Obj, theobject displayed on LCD 201, to a larger size. The user selects Area46ARa which includes Object 20646Obj by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the selected area iszoomed to fit the size of LCD 201. The zoomed photo is replaced with theoriginal photo.

Paragraph [0180]—This Paragraph [0180] illustrates the operationperformed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the zooming functiondescribed in Paragraph [0179]. A certain photo data selected by the userof Communication Device 200 is stored in Area 20646ARa of RAM 206. Here,the size of the photo data is as same as that of Area 20646ARa. In thisembodiment, Display Area 20646DA is the area which is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). Area 46ARa is the area which is selected by the user ofCommunication Device 200. Object 20646Obj is the object included in thephoto data. Area 46ARa which includes Object 20646Obj is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, andthe photo data stored in Area 20646ARa is zoomed to the size in whichthe size of Area 46ARa equals to that of Display Area 20646DA. Thezoomed photo data is replaced with the original photo data and stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646b1 (Paragraph [0169]). The portion of thephoto data which does not fit Area 20646ARa is cropped.

Paragraph [0181]—This Paragraph [0181] illustrates Digital ZoomingSoftware 20646c4 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c(Paragraph [0171]) which implements the operation described in Paragraph[0180]. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays a list of thephoto IDs representing the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area20646b1 (Paragraph [0169]) as well as the thumbnails (S1). A certainphoto data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S2), and the selected photo data is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0179] (S3). Area 46ARadescribed in Paragraph [0179] is selected by utilizing Input Device 210or via voice recognition system (S4). When a zooming signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211(FIG. 1) implements the process described in Paragraph [0180] andreplaces the original photo data with the zoomed photo data, which isstored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 (Paragraph [0169]) (S6).

Paragraph [0182]—This Paragraph [0182] illustrates one embodiment of thetrimming function which trims the photo data stored in Photo DataStorage Area 20646b1 (Paragraph [0169]) and thereby moves the selectedobject to the center of the photo data. In this embodiment, a certainphoto selected by the user of Communication Device 200 is displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). Point 20646PTa adjacent to Object 20646Obj is selectedby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,and the photo is centered at Point 20646PTa. The trimmed photo isreplaced with the original photo.

Paragraph [0183]—This Paragraph [0183] illustrates the operationperformed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the trimming functiondescribed in Paragraph [0182]. In this embodiment, Display Area 20646DAis the portion of the photo data which is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).Object 20646Obj is the object included in the photo data. Point 20646PTais the point selected by the user of Communication Device 200 adjacentto Object 20646Obj which is centered by the present function. In thisembodiment, a certain photo data selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 is stored in Area 20646ARb of RAM 206. Here, the size of thephoto data is as same as that of Area 20646ARb. Point 20646PTa isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem, and the photo data is centered at Point 20646PTa by sliding theentire photo data to the right. The trimmed photo data is replaced withthe original photo data and stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1(Paragraph [0169]). The portion of the photo data which does not fitArea 20646ARa is cropped.

Paragraph [0184]—This Paragraph [0184] illustrates Trimming Software20646c3 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c (Paragraph[0171]) which implements the operation described in Paragraph [0183]. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays a list of the photo IDsrepresenting the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1(Paragraph [0169]) as well as the thumbnails (S1). A certain photo datais selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2), and the selected photo data is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0182] (S3). Point 20646PTadescribed in Paragraph [0182] is selected by utilizing Input Device 210or via voice recognition system (S4). When a trimming signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211(FIG. 1) centers the photo data at Point 20646PTa (not shown) andreplaces the original photo data with the trimmed photo data, which isstored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646b1 (Paragraph [0169]) (S6).

Paragraph [0185]—<<Multiple Window Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0186]—Paragraph [0187] through Paragraph [0200] illustratethe multiple window displaying function which displays a plurality ofwindows on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0187]—This Paragraph [0187] illustrates the concept of thepresent function. In this embodiment, the display area of LCD 201(FIG. 1) is primarily composed of two display areas, i.e., WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA and Task Bar 20148TB. Windows Display Area20148WDA is the display area where a plurality of windows are displayed.Task Bar 20148TB is the display area located on the lower part of LCD201 (FIG. 1) where the icons corresponding to the windows displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA are displayed. In this embodiment, twowindows area displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA, i.e., Window Aand Window B. In this embodiment, Window A is displayed on top of WindowB which means that Window A has priority over Window B. Two icons, i.e.,Icon A which corresponds to Window A and Icon B are which corresponds toWindow B are displayed in Task Bar 20148TB.

Paragraph [0188]—This Paragraph [0188] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesMultiple Window Displaying Information Storage Area 20648a of which thedata and the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0190].

Paragraph [0189]—The data and/or the software programs stored inMultiple Window Displaying Information Storage Area 20648a (Paragraph[0188]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0190]—This Paragraph [0190] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Window Displaying Information Storage Area 20648a(Paragraph [0188]). In this embodiment, Multiple Window DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20648a includes Multiple Window Displaying DataStorage Area 20648b and Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area20648c. Multiple Window Displaying Data Storage Area 20648b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0191] through Paragraph [0193]. Multiple WindowDisplaying Software Storage Area 20648c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0195].

Paragraph [0191]—This Paragraph [0191] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Multiple Window Displaying Data Storage Area 20648b(Paragraph [0190]). In this embodiment, Multiple Window Displaying DataStorage Area 20648b includes Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 which isfurther explained in Paragraph [0192] and Paragraph [0193].

Paragraph [0192]—This Paragraph [0192] illustrates the method toidentify the location and the size of each window display in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]). In this embodiment, Base Point20148BP is the point of the upper-left corner of Windows Display Area20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]). Reference Point 20148RP is the point of theupper-left corner of each window displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA. The location of Reference Point 20148RP in Windows DisplayArea 20148WDAis identified based on the distance from Base Point 20148BPin ‘x cm, y cm’ format. The size of each window is identified by thewidth and the height in centimeters.

Paragraph [0193]—This Paragraph [0193] illustrates the data stored inWindow Data Storage Area 20648b1 (Paragraph [0191]). In this embodiment,Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 comprises six columns, i.e., ‘WindowID’, ‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’, ‘Height Data’, ‘PriorityData’, and ‘Icon ID’. Column ‘Window ID’ stores the identifications ofthe window data. Column ‘Reference Point Data’ stores Reference Point20148RP (Paragraph [0192]) of each window displayed in Windows DisplayArea 20148WDA (Paragraph [0192]). Column ‘Width Data’ stores the widthof each window in centimeters. Column ‘Height Data’ stores the height ofeach window in centimeters. Column ‘Priority Data’ stores the priorityof each window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA. Column ‘IconID’ stores the identifications of the icons displayed in Task Bar20148TB (Paragraph [0187]). In this embodiment, the following data areastored in Window Data Storage Area 20648b1: the ‘Window ID’ ‘Window #1’of which the ‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘Width Data’, the ‘HeightData’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘2 cm, 3 cm’, ‘5 cm’,‘2 cm’, ‘Priority #4’, and ‘Icon #1’; the ‘Window ID’ ‘Window #2’ ofwhich the ‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘Width Data’, the ‘Height Data’,the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘1 cm, 2 cm’, ‘4 cm’, ‘4 cm’,‘Priority #3’, and ‘Icon #2’; the ‘Window ID’ Window #3′ of which the‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘Width Data’, the ‘Height Data’, the‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘1 cm, 2 cm’, ‘5 cm’, ‘6 cm’,‘Priority #2’, and ‘Icon #3’; and the ‘Window ID’ ‘Window #4’ of whichthe ‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘Width Data’, the ‘Height Data’, the‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘2 cm, 3 cm’, ‘4 cm’, ‘5 cm’,‘Priority #1’, and ‘Icon #4’.

Paragraph [0194]—Referring to the ‘Priority Data’, ‘Window #4’ has thehighest priority over the rest of the windows in being displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #1’), ‘Window #3’ has thepriority over ‘Window #2’ and ‘Window #1’ in being displayed in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #2’), ‘Window #2’ has thepriority over ‘Window #1’ in being displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #3’), and ‘Window #1’ has the lowest priorityover the rest of the windows in being displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #4’).

Paragraph [0195]—This Paragraph [0195] illustrates the software programsstored in Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648c(Paragraph [0190]). In this embodiment, Multiple Window DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20648c stores Window Generating Software 20648c1,Window Closing Software 20648c2, Window Size Changing Software 20648c3,Window Size Minimizing Software 20648c4, and Window Size RestoringSoftware 20648c5. Window Generating Software 20648c1 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0196]. Window Closing Software 20648c2is the software program described in Paragraph [0197]. Window SizeChanging Software 20648c3 is the software program described in Paragraph[0198]. Window Size Minimizing Software 20648c4 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0199]. Window Size Restoring Software 20648c5 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0200].

Paragraph [0196]—This Paragraph [0196] illustrates Window OpeningSoftware 20648c1 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648c (Paragraph [0195]) which opens a new window in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) when a new software program(e.g., MS Word, MS Excel, MS Access, calculator, back-up softwareprogram, Windows Explorer, Outlook Express, image viewer, and InternetExplorer) is executed. In this embodiment, when a software program isexecuted (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) generates a new window data (S2). Thesize (i.e., the width and the height thereof) may be of the defaultsettings. CPU 211 adds a new Window ID in Window Data Storage Area20648b1 (Paragraph [0193]) for the new window data (S3). CPU 211 furthersets the highest ‘Priority Data’ (i.e., ‘Priority #1’) for the newwindow (S4), and stores the new window data generated in S2 as well asthe ‘Priority Data’ set in S4 in Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S5).CPU 211 updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows accordingly,i.e., the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shifted to the onerank lower one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ in Window DataStorage Area 20648b1 (S6). CPU 211 displays the new window in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) (S7) and the new icon on TaskBar 20148TB (Paragraph [0187]) (S8).

Paragraph [0197]—This Paragraph [0197] illustrates Window ClosingSoftware 20648c2 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648c (Paragraph [0195]) which closes the window displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) when the correspondingsoftware program is terminated. In this embodiment, when a softwareprogram is terminated (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) deletes the correspondingwindow data from Window Data Storage Area 20648b1 (Paragraph [0193])(S2). CPU 211 then closes the corresponding window displayed on WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) (S3) and erases thecorresponding icon from Task Bar 20148TB (Paragraph [0187]) (S4). CPU211 updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows accordingly, i.e.,the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shifted to the one rankhigher one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ in Window Data StorageArea 20648b1 (S5).

Paragraph [0198]—This Paragraph [0198] illustrates Window Size ChangingSoftware 20648c3 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648c (Paragraph [0195]) which changes the size of the windowdisplayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]). In thisembodiment, a certain window is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). A window size changingsignal which indicates to change the size of the window displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA is input in the same manner (S2). CPU 211(FIG. 1), by identifying the information contained in the window sizechanging signal, updates and stores the renewed window data (with new‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’, and ‘Height Data’) in Window DataStorage Area 20648b1 (Paragraph [0193]) (S3). The window with therenewed size is displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA thereafer(S4).

Paragraph [0199]—This Paragraph [0199] illustrates Window SizeMinimizing Software 20648c4 stored in Multiple Window DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20648c (Paragraph [0195]) which minimizes the sizeof the window to zero displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA(Paragraph [0187]). In this embodiment, a certain window is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). A window size minimizing signal which indicates to minimize thesize of the window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA is inputin the same manner (S2). The window data of the corresponding windowremains unchanged except the ‘Priority Data’. The ‘Priority Data’ of theminimized window is shifted to the lowest one (S3). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows accordingly, i.e., the‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shifted to the one rank higherone and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ in Window Data Storage Area20648b1 (Paragraph [0193]) (S4). The size of the window displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA is minimized thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0200]—This Paragraph [0200] illustrates Window Size RestoringSoftware 20648c5 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648c (Paragraph [0195]) which restores the size of the windowminimized by Window Size Minimizing Software 20648c4 (Paragraph [0199])to its original size. In this embodiment, a certain window is selectedby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). A window size restoring signal which indicates to restore the sizeof the window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA is input in thesame manner (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), by identifying the informationcontained in the window size restoring signal, retrieves the window data(i.e., ‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’, and ‘Height Data’) fromWindow Data Storage Area 20648b1 (Paragraph [0193]) (S3). CPU 211 setsthe highest ‘Priority Data’ (i.e., ‘Priority #1’) for the restoredwindow (S4), and stores the data in Window Data Storage Area 20648b1(S4). CPU 211 further updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windowsaccordingly, i.e., the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shiftedto the one rank lower one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ inWindow Data Storage Area 20648b1 (S5). The window size is restoredthereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0201]—<<Mouse Pointer Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0202]—Paragraph [0203] through Paragraph [0231] illustratethe mouse pointer displaying function which displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200 a mouse pointer which is manipulated by theuser of Communication Device 200. The mouse pointer is primarilyutilized to select, open, close, drag & drop files, and its image issimilar to the one displayed on ordinary personal computers.

Paragraph [0203]—This Paragraph [0203] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes MousePointer Displaying Information Storage Area 20649a of which the data andthe software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph [0205].

Paragraph [0204]—The data and/or the software programs stored in MousePointer Displaying Information Storage Area 20649a (Paragraph [0203])may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0205]—This Paragraph [0205] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Mouse Pointer Displaying Information Storage Area 20649a(Paragraph [0203]). In this embodiment, Mouse Pointer DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20649a includes Mouse Pointer Displaying DataStorage Area 20649b and Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area20649c. Mouse Pointer Displaying Data Storage Area 20649b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0206] through Paragraph [0208]. Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0209].

Paragraph [0206]—This Paragraph [0206] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Mouse Pointer Displaying Data Storage Area 20649b (Paragraph[0205]). In this embodiment, Mouse Pointer Displaying Data Storage Area20649b includes Mouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area 20649b1 andCurrent Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2. Mouse Pointer Image DataStorage Area 20649b1 stores the data described in Paragraph [0207].Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2 stores the data described inParagraph [0208].

Paragraph [0207]—This Paragraph [0207] illustrates the data stored inMouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area 20649b1 (Paragraph [0206]). Inthis embodiment, Mouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area 20649b1 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Pointer ID’ and ‘Pointer Image Data’. Column‘Pointer ID’ stores the pointer IDs, i.e., the identifications of thepointer image data stored in column ‘Pointer Image Data’, and column‘Pointer Image Data’ stores the pointer image data designed to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). The pointer image data stored in column‘Pointer Image Data’ in the present example are the following: PointerImage Data #1 which is a small white arrow, Pointer Image Data #2 whichis a large white arrow, Pointer Image Data #3 which is a small blackarrow, and Pointer Image Data #4 which is a large black arrow. Pointer#1 is the identification of Pointer Image Data #1, Pointer #2 is theidentification of Pointer Image Data #2, Pointer #3 is theidentification of Pointer Image Data #3, and Pointer #4 is theidentification of Pointer Image Data #4.

Paragraph [0208]—This Paragraph [0208] illustrates the data stored inCurrent Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2 (Paragraph [0206]). In thisembodiment, Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Selected Pointer ID’ and ‘Current Location Data’.‘Selected Pointer ID’ stores the pointer IDs of the pointer image dataselected in S3 of Paragraph [0210]. Column ‘Current Location Data’stores the current location data which represents the location of themouse pointer displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). The current location datais stored in (x cm, y cm) format wherein ‘x cm’ represents the distancefrom the base point located on the upper left corner (not shown) of LCD201 on x axis in centimeters, and ‘y cm’ represents the distance fromthe base point on y axis in centimeters. In this embodiment, the pointerID ‘Pointer #1’ is stored in column ‘Selected Pointer ID’ and thecurrent location data (2 cm, 3 cm) is stored in column ‘Current LocationData’. In this embodiment, Pointer Image Data #1 (i.e., a small whitearrow) of which the pointer ID is ‘Pointer #1’ is displayed on LCD 201at the location of 2 cm from the base point on x axis and 3 cm from thebase point on y axis.

Paragraph [0209]—This Paragraph [0209] illustrates the software programsstored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649c(Paragraph [0205]). In this embodiment, Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c stores Mouse Pointer Image Data SelectingSoftware 20649c1, Mouse Pointer Moving Software 20649c2, Mouse PointerDisplaying Software 20649c3, VRS Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649c4, Keypad Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649c5, Joystick Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c6, andETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c7. Mouse PointerImage Data Selecting Software 20649c1 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0210]. Mouse Pointer Moving Software 20649c2 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0211]. Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware 20649c3 is the software program described in Paragraph [0212].VRS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c4 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0214] through Paragraph [0217]. KeypadPointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c5 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0218] through Paragraph [0221]. Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649c6 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0222] through Paragraph [0225]. ETS PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649c7 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0226] through Paragraph [0230].

Paragraph [0210]—This Paragraph [0210] illustrates Mouse Pointer ImageData Selecting Software 20649c1 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which selects the mousepointer image data from a list displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves all pointer image data from MousePointer Image Data Storage Area 20649b1 (Paragraph [0207]) (S1) anddisplays a list thereof on LCD 201 (S2). A mouse pointer image data isselected from the list by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3), and CPU 211 stores the correspondingpointer ID in column ‘Selected Pointer ID’ of Current Pointer DataStorage Area 20649b2 (Paragraph [0208]) (S4).

Paragraph [0211]—This Paragraph [0211] illustrates Mouse Pointer MovingSoftware 20649c2 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which updates the current location datastored in Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2 (Paragraph [0208])when mouse pointer moving signal is input. In this embodiment, a mousepointer moving signal indicating to move the mouse pointer displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) to a new location is input by the method describedhereinafter (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then calculates the new locationwhere the mouse pointer is to be displayed (S2), and stores the newcurrent location data in ‘Current Location Data’ of Current Pointer DataStorage Area 20649b2 (Paragraph [0208]) (S3).

Paragraph [0212]—This Paragraph [0212] illustrates Mouse PointerDisplaying Software 20649c3 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which displays the mouse pointeron LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves thepointer ID from column ‘Selected Pointer ID’ of Current Pointer DataStorage Area 20649b2 (Paragraph [0208]) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves thecorresponding pointer image data from Mouse Pointer Image Data StorageArea 20649b1 (Paragraph [0207]) (S2). CPU 211 further retrieves thecurrent location data from column ‘Current Location Data’ of CurrentPointer Data Storage Area 20649b2 (Paragraph [0208]) (S3). Based on thedata retrieved in S1 through S3, CPU 211 displays the pointer image dataon LCD 201 in accordance with the current location data (S4).

Paragraph [0213]—The software programs described in Paragraph [0211] andParagraph [0212] are repeated periodically, preferably sixty times everysecond.

Paragraph [0214]—This Paragraph [0214] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove up the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move up’ isinput via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0215]—This Paragraph [0215] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove down the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move down’is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0216]—This Paragraph [0216] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove left the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move left’is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0217]—This Paragraph [0217] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove right the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move right’is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0218]—This Paragraph [0218] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove up the mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric DataInput Device 21000a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘8’ isinput via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move up the mouse pointer(S2).

Paragraph [0219]—This Paragraph [0219] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove down the mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric DataInput Device 21000a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘2’ isinput via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move down the mousepointer (S2).

Paragraph [0220]—This Paragraph [0220] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove left the mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric DataInput Device 21000a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘4’ isinput via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move left the mousepointer (S2).

Paragraph [0221]—This Paragraph [0221] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove right the mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric DataInput Device 21000a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘6’ isinput via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move right the mousepointer (S2).

Paragraph [0222]—This Paragraph [0222] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649c6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph[0211] indicating to move up the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000d is shifted up(S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointermoving signal indicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0223]—This Paragraph [0223] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649c6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph[0211] indicating to move down the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000d is shifted down(S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointermoving signal indicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0224]—This Paragraph [0224] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649c6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph[0211] indicating to move left the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000d is shifted left(S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointermoving signal indicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0225]—This Paragraph [0225] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649c6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph[0211] indicating to move right the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick21000d (not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000d is shifted right(S1). In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointermoving signal indicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0226]—This Paragraph [0226] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph [0211] indicating tomove up the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. Here,the eye tracking system is a system to move the mouse pointer displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) by utilizing the eye of the user of CommunicationDevice 200. By utilizing this system, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodicallymonitors the movement of the eyes of the user of Communication Device200, and the mouse pointer automatically moves to the location at whichhe/she is currently gazing. The mechanism of the eye tracking system isintroduced in the following inventions and the references cited thereof:U.S. Pat. No. 6,459,446; U.S. Pat. No. 6,394,602; U.S. Pat. No.6,381,339; U.S. Pat. No. 6,373,961; U.S. Pat. No. 6,359,601; U.S. Pat.No. 5,926,251; U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,940; U.S. Pat. No. 5,859,686; U.S.Pat. No. 5,638,176; U.S. Pat. No. 5,635,947; U.S. Pat. No. 5,583,335;U.S. Pat. No. 5,491,492; U.S. Pat. No. 5,481,622; U.S. Pat. No.5,430,505; U.S. Pat. No. 5,410,376; U.S. Pat. No. 5,345,281; U.S. Pat.No. 5,331,149; U.S. Pat. No. 5,270,748; U.S. Pat. No. 5,231,674; andU.S. Pat. No. 4,376,309. The eye tracking system may be implemented byutilizing CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) or an eye tracking unit may be installedin Communication Device 200 to implement the system. For the avoidanceof doubt, the eye tracking system may be implemented by either ahardware unit or a software program.

Paragraph [0227]—In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device200 rolls up his/her eyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointermoving signal indicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0228]—This Paragraph [0228] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating to movedown the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 rolls down his/hereyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG.1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0229]—This Paragraph [0229] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating to moveleft the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 rolls left his/hereyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG.1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0230]—This Paragraph [0230] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649c7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating to moveright the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 rolls right his/hereyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG.1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0231]—This Paragraph [0231] illustrates a differentembodiment of Mouse Pointer Moving Software 20649c2 stored in MousePointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649c (Paragraph [0209]) whichis executed in combination of eye tracking system explainedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1), by utilizing the eyetracking system, determines the location on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at whichthe user of Communication Device 200 is currently gazing (S1). CPU 211then determines the new location where the mouse pointer is to bedisplayed (S2), and stores the new and updated current location data in‘Current Location Data’ of Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649b2(Paragraph [0208]) (S3).

Paragraph [0232]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0233]—Paragraph [0234] through Paragraph [0264] illustratethe multiple language displaying function wherein a language is selectedfrom a plurality of languages, such as English, Japanese, French, andGerman, which is utilized to operate Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0234]—This Paragraph [0234] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesMultiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0236].

Paragraph [0235]—The data and/or the software programs stored inMultiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a (Paragraph [0234])may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0236]—This Paragraph [0236] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a(Paragraph [0234]). In this embodiment, Multiple Language DisplayingInfo Storage Area 20654a includes Multiple Language Displaying DataStorage Area 20654b and Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c. Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654bstores the data necessary to implement the present function, such as theones described in Paragraph [0237] through Paragraph [0245]. MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0246].

Paragraph [0237]—This Paragraph [0237] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654b(Paragraph [0236]). In this embodiment, Multiple Language DisplayingData Storage Area 20654b includes Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1,Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2, Language Item Data Storage Area20654b3, and Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4. LanguageTables Storage Area 20654b1 stores the data described in Paragraph[0238]. Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0244]. Language Item Data Storage Area 20654b3stores the data described in Paragraph [0245]. Selected Language TableID Storage Area 20654b4 stores the language table ID selected in S4s ofParagraph [0248] and Paragraph [0257].

Paragraph [0238]—This Paragraph [0238] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0237]). Inthis embodiment, Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 includes LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a, Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b,Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c, and Language Table#4 StorageArea 20654b1d. Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0239]. Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1bstores the data described in Paragraph [0241]. Language Table#3 StorageArea 20654b1c stores the data described in Paragraph [0242]. LanguageTable#4 Storage Area 20654b1d stores the data described in Paragraph[0243].

Paragraph [0239]—This Paragraph [0239] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata.

Paragraph [0240]—Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language textdata, and each language text data represents the English text datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a stores the following data: the language item ID‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Open file’;the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘Close file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Delete’; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Copy’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Insert’; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘File’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Edit’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘View’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Format’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language text data‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Window’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Help’; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘MyNetwork’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Trash’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Local Disk’; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Save’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Yes’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data No; and the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#21’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Cancel’.

Paragraph [0241]—This Paragraph [0241] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1b comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the Japanese text data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1b stores the following data: the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#1’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Open file’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Close file’ in Japanese; the language itemID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Delete’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Copy’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Cut’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Paste’ in Japanese;the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding languagetext data meaning ‘Insert’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#8’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘File’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Edit’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘View’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Format’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Tools’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Window’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Help’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘MyNetwork’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Trash’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Local Disk’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Save’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Yes’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘No’in Japanese; and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Cancel’ in Japanese.

Paragraph [0242]—This Paragraph [0242] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1c comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the French text data displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1cstores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#1’ meaning ‘Open file’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ in French; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘French#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#4’meaning ‘Copy’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in French; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘French#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#7’meaning ‘Insert’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#8’ meaning ‘File’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#10’ meaning ‘View’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#11’ meaning‘Format’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#14’meaning ‘Help’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#15’ meaning ‘My Network’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#18’meaning ‘Save’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#19’ meaning ‘Yes’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#20’ meaning ‘No’ in French; and the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in French.

Paragraph [0243]—This Paragraph [0243] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1d comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the German text data displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1dstores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#1’ meaning ‘Open file’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ in German; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘German#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#4’meaning ‘Copy’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in German; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘German#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#7’meaning ‘Insert’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#8’ meaning ‘File’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#10’ meaning ‘View’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#11’ meaning‘Format’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#14’meaning ‘Help’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#15’ meaning ‘My Network’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#18’meaning ‘Save’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#19’ meaning ‘Yes’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#20’ meaning ‘No’ in German; and the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in German.

Paragraph [0244]—This Paragraph [0244] illustrates data stored inLanguage Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 (Paragraph [0237]). In thisembodiment, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Table ID’ and ‘Language Type Data’. Column‘Language Table ID’ stores the language table ID, and each languagetable ID represents the identification of the storage areas included inLanguage Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0238]). Column‘Language Type Data’ stores the language type data, and each languagetype data represents the type of the language utilized in the languagetable of the corresponding language table ID. In this embodiment,Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 stores the following data: thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table#1’ and the corresponding language typedata ‘English’; the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ and thecorresponding language type data ‘Japanese’; the language table ID‘Language Table#3’ and the corresponding language type data ‘French’;and the language table ID ‘Language Table#4’ and the correspondinglanguage type data ‘German’. Here, the language table ID ‘LanguageTable#1’ is an identification of Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a(Paragraph [0239]); the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ is anidentification of Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph[0241]); the language table ID ‘Language Table#3’ is an identificationof Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0242]); and thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table#4’ is an identification of LanguageTable#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0243]).

Paragraph [0245]—This Paragraph [0245] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Item Data Storage Area 20654b3 (Paragraph [0237]). In thisembodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654b3 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Item Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language itemdata. Column ‘Language Item Data’ stores the language item data, andeach language item data represents the content and/or the meaning of thelanguage text data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment,Language Item Data Storage Area 20654b3 stores the following data: thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Open file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Close file’; the language item ID‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Delete’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Copy’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#6’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Paste’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language item data‘Insert’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘File’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Edit’; the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language item data ‘View’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#11 ’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Format’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Window’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language item data‘Help’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘My Network’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’and the corresponding language item data ‘Trash’; the language item ID‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language item data ‘LocalDisk’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Save’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Yes’; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language item data No; and thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Cancel’. Primarily, the data stored in column ‘Language Item Data’are same as the ones stored in column ‘Language Text Data’ of LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]).

Paragraph [0246]—This Paragraph [0246] illustrates the software programstored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c(Paragraph [0236]). In this embodiment, Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c stores Language Selecting Software 20654c1,Selected Language Displaying Software 20654c2, Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a, Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b, and Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654c4. Language Selecting Software20654c1 is the software program described in Paragraph [0248] andParagraph [0257]. Selected Language Displaying Software 20654c2 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0249] and Paragraph [0258].Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a isthe software program described in Paragraph [0250] and Paragraph [0259].Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b isthe software program described in Paragraph [0253] and Paragraph [0261].Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0254] and Paragraph [0263].

Paragraph [0247]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingEnglish>>

Paragraph [0248]—Paragraph [0248] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654c1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c (Paragraph [0246]) which selects the language utilized tooperate Communication Device 200 from a plurality of languages. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves thelanguage type data from Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2(Paragraph [0244]) (S1), and Displays a list of available languages onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, the following languagesare displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French, and German. Acertain language is selected therefrom by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that ‘English’ isselected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language table IDcorresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2 (Paragraph [0244]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#1) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4(Paragraph [0237]) (S4).

Paragraph [0249]—This Paragraph [0249] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654c2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph (i.e., English).In this embodiment, when Communication Device 200 is powered on (S1),CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves the selectedlanguage table ID (Language Table#1) from Selected Language Table IDStorage Area 20654b4 (Paragraph [0237]) (S2). CPU 211 then identifiesthe storage area corresponding to the language table ID selected in S2(Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239])) in LanguageTables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0238]) (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0250]—This Paragraph [0250] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘File’ at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#9’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Edit’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘View’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4).CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Format’ at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph[0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘Tools’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘Window’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7).CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Help’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the wordprocessor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system thereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0251]—This Paragraph [0251] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0250])is implemented. In this embodiment, the word processor described inParagraph [0250] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154 MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0250] are displayed on Menu Bar20154MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In this embodiment, 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBE is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBTis the language text data processed in S6 of the previous paragraph;20154MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of the previousparagraph; and 20154MBH is the language text data processed in S8 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0252]—This Paragraph [0253] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 initiates the closing process of the word processor in response tothe signal input by the user of Communication Device 200 indicating toclose the word processor (S1). In the process of closing the wordprocessor, the following steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely,CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Save’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph[0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘Yes’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘No’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Cancel’ at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to save thealphanumeric data input in S9 of Paragraph [0250] is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, assuming thatthe user of Communication Device 200 intends to save the data (S6), andthe data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7).The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0253]—This Paragraph [0253] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b (Paragraph [0253])is implemented. In this embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying Software For WordProcessor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0250]) is closed. In this embodiment,Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN,and 20154PrC. In this embodiment, 20154PrS is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrY is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0254]—This Paragraph [0254] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer like software programin response to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the software program (S1). In theprocess of displaying the Windows Explorer like software program on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the steps of S2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘My Network’ at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Trash’ at the predetermined location in the WindowsExplorer like software program(S3). CPU 211 identifies the language itemID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a(Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘Local Disk’ at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer likesoftware program(S4).

Paragraph [0255]—This Paragraph [0255] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 (Paragraph [0254]) isexecuted. In this embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In this embodiment, 20154LDis the language text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph;20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of the previousparagraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed in S3 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0256]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingJapanese>>

Paragraph [0257]—Paragraph [0257] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654c1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c (Paragraph [0246]) which selects the language utilized tooperate Communication Device 200 from a plurality of languages. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves thelanguage type data from Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2(Paragraph [0244]) (S1), and Displays a list of available languages onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, the following languagesare displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French, and German. Acertain language is selected therefrom by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that ‘Japanese’ isselected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language table IDcorresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2 (Paragraph [0244]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#2) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4(Paragraph [0237]) (S4).

Paragraph [0258]—This Paragraph [0258] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654c2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph (i.e., Japanese).In this embodiment, when Communication Device 200 is powered on (S1),CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves the selectedlanguage table ID (Language Table#2) from Selected Language Table IDStorage Area 20654b4 (Paragraph [0237]) (S2). CPU 211 then identifiesthe storage area corresponding to the language table ID selected in S2(Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241])) in LanguageTables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0238]) (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0259]—This Paragraph [0259] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#2Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data indicating ‘File’ in Japanese at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b(Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Edit’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#10’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘View’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Format’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘Tools’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Window’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Help’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data isinput to the word processor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0260]—This Paragraph [0260] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0259])is implemented. In this embodiment, the word processor described inParagraph [0259] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0259] are displayed on Menu Bar20154MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In this embodiment, 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBE is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBTis the language text data processed in S6 of the previous paragraph;20154MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of the previousparagraph; and 20154MBH is the language text data processed in S8 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0261]—This Paragraph [0261] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 initiates the closing process of the word processor in response tothe signal input by the user of Communication Device 200 indicating toclose the word processor (S1). In the process of closing the wordprocessor, the following steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely,CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Save’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘Yes’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#20’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘No’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Cancel’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S5). The save signalindicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 of Paragraph isinput by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem, assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends tosave the data (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined locationin RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0262]—This Paragraph [0262] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b (Paragraph [0261])is implemented. In this embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying Software For WordProcessor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0259]) is closed. In this embodiment,Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN,and 20154PrC. In this embodiment, 20154PrS is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrY is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0263]—This Paragraph [0263] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0246]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer like software programin response to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the software program (S1). In theprocess of displaying the Windows Explorer like software program on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S4 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ inLanguage Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) and displaysthe corresponding language text data indicating ‘My Network’ in Japaneseat the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer like softwareprogram (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241]) anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Trash’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer likesoftware program(S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#17’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘LocalDisk’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorerlike software program(S4).

Paragraph [0264]—This Paragraph [0264] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 (Paragraph [0263]) isexecuted. In this embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In this embodiment, 20154LDis the language text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph;20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of the previousparagraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed in S3 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0265]—<<Caller's Information Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0266]—Paragraph [0270] through Paragraph [0315] illustratethe Caller's Information displaying function which displays theInformation regarding the caller (e.g., name, phone number, emailaddress, and home address, etc.) on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) when CommunicationDevice 200 is utilized as a ‘TV phone’.

Paragraph [0267]—Paragraph [0270] through Paragraph [0277] illustratethe data and software programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice, a Communication Device 200, utilized by the caller.

Paragraph [0268]—Paragraph [0278] through Paragraph [0285] illustratethe data and software programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice, a Communication Device 200, utilized by the callee.

Paragraph [0269]—Paragraph [0286] through Paragraph [0289] illustratethe data and software programs stored in Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0270]—This Paragraph [0270] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, RAM206 of Caller's Device includes Caller's Information DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20655a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0271].

Paragraph [0271]—This Paragraph [0271] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655a (Paragraph [0270]). In this embodiment, Caller's InformationDisplaying Information Storage Area 20655a includes Caller's InformationDisplaying Data Storage Area 20655b and Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c. Caller's Information Displaying DataStorage Area 20655b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Caller's Device, such as the ones described inParagraph [0272] through Paragraph [0276]. Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0277].

Paragraph [0272]—This Paragraph [0272] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b. Inthis embodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area20655b includes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2, Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b3, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4, Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5, Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655b6, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7, Callee'sMap Data Storage Area 20655b8, and Work Area 20655b9. Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1 stores the data described inParagraph [0273]. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0274]. Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0275]. Callee'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655b4 stores the data described inParagraph [0276]. Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5stores the caller's calculated GPS data which represents the currentgeographic location of Caller's Device in (x, y, z) format. Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6 stores the callee's calculatedGPS data which represents the current geographic location of Callee'sDevice in (x, y, z) format. Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7stores the map data representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Callee's Map Data StorageArea 20655b8 stores the map data representing the surrounding area ofthe location indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Work Area20655b9 is a storage area utilized to perform calculation and totemporarily store data.

Paragraph [0273]—This Paragraph [0273] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1 (Paragraph[0272]). In this embodiment, Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655b1 includes Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1a and Caller'sVisual Data Storage Area 20655b1b. Caller's Audio Data Storage Area20655b1a stores the caller's audio data which represents the audio datainput via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Caller's VisualData Storage Area 20655b1b stores the caller's visual data whichrepresents the visual data input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice.

Paragraph [0274]—This Paragraph [0274] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2 (Paragraph[0272]). In this embodiment, Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655b2 includes Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2a and Callee'sVisual Data Storage Area 20655b2b. Callee's Audio Data Storage Area20655b2a stores the callee's audio data which represents the audio datasent from Callee's Device. Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2bstores the callee's visual data which represents the visual data sentfrom Callee's Device.

Paragraph [0275]—This Paragraph [0275] illustrates the data stored inCaller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3 (Paragraph [0272]). In thisembodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Caller's Personal Data’ and ‘Permitted Caller's PersonalData Flag’. Column ‘Caller's Personal Data’ stores the caller's personaldata which represent the personal data of the caller. Column ‘PermittedCaller's Personal Data Flag’ stores the permitted caller's personal dataflag and each permitted caller's personal data flag represents whetherthe corresponding caller's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device. The permitted caller's personal data flag isrepresented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding caller's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding caller'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device. Inthis embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3 stores thefollowing data: the caller's name and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's phone number and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller'semail address and the corresponding permitted caller's personal dataflag ‘1’; the caller's home address and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's business address and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'stitle and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’;the caller's hobby and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’; the caller's blood type and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller's gender and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'sage and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; andcaller's date of birth and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’.

Paragraph [0276]—This Paragraph [0276] illustrates the data stored inCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 (Paragraph [0272]). In thisembodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 stores thecallee's personal data which represent the personal data of the calleewhich are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In thisembodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 stores thecallee's name and phone number.

Paragraph [0277]—This Paragraph [0277] illustrates the software programsstored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c(Paragraph [0271]). In this embodiment, Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c stores Permitted Caller's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655c1, Dialing Software 20655c2, Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software 20655c3, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software20655c4, Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5, Caller'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6, Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655c6a, Permitted Callee's Personal DataDisplaying Software 20655c7, Map Displaying Software 20655c8, Callee'sAudio Data Outputting Software 20655c9, and Callee's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10. Permitted Caller's Personal Data SelectingSoftware 20655c1 is the software program described in Paragraph [0291].Dialing Software 20655c2 is the software program described in Paragraph[0292]. Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0293] and Paragraph [0294]. Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655c4 is the software program described inParagraph [0295]. Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5is the software program described in Paragraph [0296]. Caller'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0297]. Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655c6a is the software program described in Paragraph [0311].Permitted Callee's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655c7 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0312]. Map Displaying Software20655c8 is the software program described in Paragraph [0313]. Callee'sAudio Data Outputting Software 20655c9 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0314]. Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655c10is the software program described in Paragraph [0315].

Paragraph [0278]—This Paragraph [0278] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206A (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment,RAM 206A of Callee's Device includes Callee's Information DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20655aA of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0279].

Paragraph [0279]—This Paragraph [0279] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655aA (Paragraph [0278]). In this embodiment, Callee's InformationDisplaying Information Storage Area 20655aA includes Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA and Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA. Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Callee'sDevice, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0280] through Paragraph[0284]. Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cAstores the software programs necessary to implement the present functionon the side of Callee's Device, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0285].

Paragraph [0280]—This Paragraph [0280] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA.In this embodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area20655bA includes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2A, Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3A, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A,Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5A, Callee's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7A,Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A, and Work Area 20655b9A.Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0281]. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655b2A stores the data described in Paragraph [0282]. Caller'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655b3A stores the data described inParagraph [0283]. Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A storesthe data described in Paragraph [0284]. Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655b5A stores the caller's calculated GPS data whichrepresents the current geographic location of Caller's Device in (x, y,z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A stores thecallee's calculated GPS data which represents the current geographiclocation of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655b7A stores the map data representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data.Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A stores the map data representingthe surrounding area of the location indicated by the callee'scalculated GPS data. Work Area 20655b9A is a storage area utilized toperform calculation and to temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0281]—This Paragraph [0281] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A (Paragraph[0280]). In this embodiment, Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655b1A includes Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1aA andCaller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA. Caller's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b1aA stores the caller's audio data which represents the audiodata sent from Caller's Device in a wireless fashion. Caller's VisualData Storage Area 20655b1bA stores the caller's visual data whichrepresents the visual data input sent from Caller's Device in a wirelessfashion.

Paragraph [0282]—This Paragraph [0282] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2A (Paragraph[0280]). In this embodiment, Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655b2A includes Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA andCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2bA. Callee's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b2aA stores the callee's audio data which represents the audiodata input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. Callee'sVisual Data Storage Area 20655b2bA stores the callee's visual data whichrepresents the visual data input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice.

Paragraph [0283]—This Paragraph [0283] illustrates the data stored inCaller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A (Paragraph [0280]). In thisembodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A stores thecaller's personal data which represent the personal data of the callerwhich are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In thisembodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A stores thecaller's name, phone number, email address, and home address.

Paragraph [0284]—This Paragraph [0284] illustrates the data stored inCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A (Paragraph [0280]). In thisembodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Callee's Personal Data’ and ‘Permitted Callee's PersonalData Flag’. Column ‘Callee's Personal Data’ stores the callee's personaldata which represent the personal data of the callee. Column ‘PermittedCallee's Personal Data Flag’ stores the permitted callee's personal dataflag and each permitted callee's personal data flag represents whetherthe corresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device. The permitted callee's personal data flag isrepresented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding callee'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device. Inthis embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A stores thefollowing data: callee's name and the corresponding permitted callee'spersonal data flag ‘1’; the callee's phone number and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee's email addressand the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; thecallee's home address and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’; the callee's business address and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's title and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'shobby and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’;the callee's blood type and the corresponding permitted callee'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the callee's gender and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's age and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; and callee'sdate of birth and the corresponding permitted callee's personal dataflag ‘0’.

Paragraph [0285]—This Paragraph [0285] illustrates the software programsstored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA(Paragraph [0279]). In this embodiment, Callee's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655cA stores Permitted Callee's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655c1A, Dialing Software 20655c2A, Callee's DevicePin-pointing Software 20655c3A, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software20655c4A, Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5A,Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6A, Caller'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6aA, Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655c7A, Map Displaying Software20655c8A, Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c9A, and Caller'sVisual Data Displaying Software 20655c10A. Permitted Callee's PersonalData Selecting Software 20655c1A is the software program described inParagraph [0304]. Dialing Software 20655c2A is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0305]. Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software20655c3A is the software program described in Paragraph [0306] andParagraph [0307]. Map Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4A is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0308]. Callee's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655c5A is the software program described inParagraph [0309]. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655c6A is the software program described in Paragraph [0310]. Caller'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6aA is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0298]. Permitted Caller's Personal DataDisplaying Software 20655c7A is the software program described inParagraph [0299]. Map Displaying Software 20655c8A is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0300]. Caller's Audio Data OutputtingSoftware 20655c9A is the software program described in Paragraph [0301].Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655c10A is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0302].

Paragraph [0286]—This Paragraph [0286] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host Hincludes Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described hereinafter.

Paragraph [0287]—This Paragraph [0287] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55a. In thisembodiment, Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55a includesCaller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b and Caller/Callee Software StorageArea H55c. Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H(Paragraph [0025]), such as the ones described in Paragraph [0288].Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described in Paragraph [0289].

Paragraph [0288]—This Paragraph [0288] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b. In this embodiment,Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b includes Caller's InformationStorage Area H55b1, Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2, Map DataStorage Area H55b3, Work Area h55b4, Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area H55b5, and Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b6.Caller's Information Storage Area H55b1 stores the Caller's Informationreceived Caller's Device. Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2 storesthe Callee's Information received Callee's Device. Map Data Storage AreaH55b3 stores the map data received from Caller's Device and Callee'sDevice. Work Area H55b4 is a storage area utilized to performcalculation and to temporarily store data. Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area H55b5 stores the caller's calculated GPS data. Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b6 stores the callee's calculatedGPS data.

Paragraph [0289]—This Paragraph [0289] illustrates the software programsstored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]).In this embodiment, Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c storesDialing Software H55c2, Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c3,Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c3a, Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55c4, Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software H55c6,and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software H55c6a. DialingSoftware H55c2 is the software program described in Paragraph [0292] andParagraph [0305]. Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c3 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0293]. Callee's DevicePin-pointing Software H55c3a is the software program described inParagraph [0306]. Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55c4 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0295] and Paragraph [0308].Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software H55c6 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0297]. Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6a is the software program described inParagraph [0310] and Paragraph [0311].

Paragraph [0290]—Paragraph [0291] through Paragraph [0302] primarilyillustrate the sequence to output the Caller's Information (which isdefined hereinafter) from Callee's Device.

Paragraph [0291]—This Paragraph [0291] illustrates Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655c1 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller'sDevice, which selects the permitted caller's personal data to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment,CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves all of the caller'spersonal data from Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3(Paragraph [0275]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The caller selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the caller'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device (S3). Thepermitted caller's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

Paragraph [0292]—This Paragraph [0292] illustrates Dialing SoftwareH55c2 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph[0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), Dialing Software 20655c2 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0277]) of Caller's Device, and Dialing Software 20655c2A stored inCallee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph[0285]) of Callee's Device, which enables to connect between Caller'sDevice and Callee's Device via Host H (Paragraph [0025]) in a wirelessfashion. In this embodiment, a connection is established betweenCaller's Device and Host H (S1). Next, a connection is establishedbetween Host H and Callee's Device (S2). As a result, Caller's Deviceand Callee's Device are able to exchange audiovisual data, text data,and various types of data with each other. The connection is maintaineduntil Caller's Device, Host H, or Callee's Device terminates theconnection.

Paragraph [0293]—This Paragraph [0293] illustrates Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software H55c3 (Paragraph [0289]) stored in Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0277]) of Caller's Device, which identifies the current geographiclocation of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device collects the GPS raw data from the near base stations(S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPS data to Host H (S2). Upon receiving theraw GPS data (S3), Host H produces the caller's calculated GPS data byreferring to the raw GPS data (S4). Host H stores the caller'scalculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b5(Paragraph [0288]) (S5). Host H then retrieves the caller's calculatedGPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b5 (Paragraph[0288]) (S6), and sends the data to Caller's Device (S7). Upon receivingthe caller's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8), CPU 211 stores thedata in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5 (Paragraph[0272]) (S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive data utilized toproduce the caller's calculated GPS data, and the caller's calculatedGPS data is the data representing the location of Caller's Device in (x,y, z) format. The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0294]—This Paragraph [0294] illustrates another embodiment ofthe sequence described in Paragraph [0293] in which the entire processis performed solely by Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c(Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects the raw GPS data from the near basestations (S1). CPU 211 then produces the caller's calculated GPS data byreferring to the raw GPS data (S2), and stores the caller's calculatedGPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5 (Paragraph[0272]) (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0295]—This Paragraph [0295] illustrates Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55c4 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andMap Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277])of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the map data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the caller'scalculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655b5 (Paragraph [0272]) (S1), and sends the data to Host H (S2). Uponreceiving the calculated GPS data from Caller's Device (S3), Host Hidentifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph[0288]) (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of thelocation indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Host H retrievesthe map data from Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph [0288]) (S5),and sends the data to Caller's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map datafrom Host H (S7), Caller's Device stores the data in Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655b7 (Paragraph [0272]) (S8). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0296]—This Paragraph [0296] illustrates Caller's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655c5 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller'sDevice, which collects the audiovisual data of the caller to be sent toCallee's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device retrieves the caller's audiovisual data from CCD Unit214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores the caller's audio datain Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1a (Paragraph [0273]) (S2),and the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area20655b1b (Paragraph [0273]) (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0297]—This Paragraph [0297] illustrates Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCaller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0277]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller'sInformation (which is defined hereinafter) between Caller's Device andHost H. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the permitted caller's personal data from Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655b3 (Paragraph [0275]) (S1). CPU 211 retrieves thecaller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b5 (Paragraph [0272]) (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the map datafrom Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7 (Paragraph [0272]) (S3). CPU211 retrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b1a (Paragraph [0273]) (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the caller'svisual data from Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1b (Paragraph[0273]) (S5). CPU 211 then sends the data retrieved in S1 through S5(collectively defined as the ‘Caller's Information’ hereinafter) to HostH (S6). Upon receiving the Caller's Information from Caller's Device(S7), Host H stores the Caller's Information in Caller's InformationStorage Area H55b1 (Paragraph [0288]) (S8). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0298]—This Paragraph [0298] illustrates Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCaller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6aA (Paragraph[0285]) stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receivesthe Caller's Information between Host H and Callee's Device. In thisembodiment, Host H retrieves the Caller's Information from Caller'sInformation Storage Area H55b1 (Paragraph [0288]) (S1), and sends theCaller's Information to Callee's Device (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device receives the Caller's Information from Host H (S3). CPU211 stores the permitted caller's personal data in Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655b3A (Paragraph [0283]) (S4). CPU 211 stores thecaller's calculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b5A (Paragraph [0280]) (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7A (Paragraph [0280]) (S6). CPU 211stores the caller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area20655b1aA (Paragraph [0281]) (S7). CPU 211 stores the caller's visualdata in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA (Paragraph [0281])(S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

Paragraph [0299]—This Paragraph [0299] illustrates Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655c7A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0285])of Callee's Device, which displays the permitted caller's personal dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the permitted caller's personaldata from Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A (Paragraph[0283]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted caller's personal dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0300]—This Paragraph [0300] illustrates Map DisplayingSoftware 20655c8A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device, whichdisplays the map representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's calculated GPSdata from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5A (Paragraph[0280]) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data from Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655b7A (Paragraph [0280]) (S2), and arranges on the mapdata the caller's current location icon in accordance with the caller'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the caller's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Caller's Device in the map data.The map with the caller's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0301]—This Paragraph [0301] illustrates Caller's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655c9A stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device,which outputs the caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio Data Storage Area20655b1aA (Paragraph [0281]) (S1). CPU 211 then outputs the caller'saudio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0302]—This Paragraph [0302] illustrates Caller's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10A stored in Callee's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device,which displays the caller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves the caller's visual data from Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655b1bA (Paragraph [0281]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays thecaller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0303]—Paragraph [0304] through Paragraph [0315] primarilyillustrate the sequence to output the Callee's Information (which isdefined hereinafter) from Caller's Device.

Paragraph [0304]—This Paragraph [0304] illustrates Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655c1A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0285]) of Callee'sDevice, which selects the permitted callee's personal data to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment,CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves all of the callee'spersonal data from Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A(Paragraph [0284]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The callee selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the callee'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device (S3). Thepermitted callee's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

Paragraph [0305]—This Paragraph [0305] illustrates Dialing SoftwareH55c2 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph[0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), Dialing Software 20655c2A storedin Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA(Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device, and Dialing Software 20655c2stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c(Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device, which enables to connect betweenCallee's Device and Caller's Device via Host H (Paragraph [0025]) in awireless fashion. In this embodiment, a connection is establishedbetween Callee's Device and Host H (S1). Next, a connection isestablished between Host H and Caller's Device (S2). As a result,Callee's Device and Caller's Device are able to exchange audiovisualdata, text data, and various types of data with each other. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is not necessarily implemented if theconnection between Caller's Device and Callee's Device is established asdescribed in Paragraph [0292]. The sequence described in the presentparagraph may be implemented if the connection is accidentallyterminated by Callee's Device and the connection process is initiated byCallee's Device.

Paragraph [0306]—This Paragraph [0306] illustrates Callee's DevicePin-pointing Software H55c3a stored in Caller/Callee Software StorageArea H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655c3A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device, whichidentifies the current geographic location of Callee's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the GPS rawdata from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPS data toHost H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data (S3), Host H produces thecallee's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S4). HostH stores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area H55b6 (Paragraph [0288]) (S5). Host H then retrievesthe callee's calculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area H55b6 (Paragraph [0288]) (S6), and sends the data toCallee's Device (S7). Upon receiving the callee's calculated GPS datafrom Host H (S8), CPU 211 stores the data in Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655b6A (Paragraph [0280]) (S9). Here, the GPS rawdata are the primitive data utilized to produce the callee's calculatedGPS data, and the callee's calculated GPS data is the data representingthe location of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0307]—This Paragraph [0307] illustrates another embodiment ofthe sequence described in Paragraph [0306] in which the entire processis performed solely by Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3Astored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA(Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the raw GPS data from the near basestations (S1). CPU 211 then produces the callee's calculated GPS data byreferring to the raw GPS data (S2), and stores the callee's calculatedGPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A(Paragraph [0280]) (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraphis repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0308]—This Paragraph [0308] illustrates Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55c4 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andMap Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0285])of Callee's Device, which sends and receives the map data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the callee'scalculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655b6A (Paragraph [0280]) (S1), and sends the data to Host H (S2).Upon receiving the calculated GPS data from Callee's Device (S3), Host Hidentifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph[0288]) (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of thelocation indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Host H retrievesthe map data from Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph [0288]) (S5),and sends the data to Callee's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map datafrom Host H (S7), Callee's Device stores the data in Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655b8A (Paragraph [0280]) (S8). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0309]—This Paragraph [0309] illustrates Callee's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655c5A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0285]) of Callee'sDevice, which collects the audiovisual data of the callee to be sent toCaller's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device retrieves the callee's audiovisual data from CCD Unit214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores the callee's audio datain Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA (Paragraph [0282]) (S2),and the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual Data Storage Area20655b2bA (Paragraph [0282]) (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0310]—This Paragraph [0310] illustrates Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6a (Paragraph [0289]) stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655c6A (Paragraph [0285]) stored in Callee's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device, which sends andreceives the Callee's Information (which is defined hereinafter) betweenCallee's Device and Host H. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device retrieves the permitted callee's personal data fromCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A (Paragraph [0284]) (S1).CPU 211 retrieves the callee's calculated GPS data from Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A (Paragraph [0280]) (S2). CPU211 retrieves the map data from Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A(Paragraph [0280]) (S3). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's audio data fromCallee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA (Paragraph [0282]) (S4). CPU211 retrieves the callee's visual data from Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655b2bA (Paragraph [0282]) (S5). CPU 211 then sends the dataretrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined as the ‘Callee'sInformation’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receiving the Callee'sInformation from Callee's Device (S7), Host H stores the Callee'sInformation in Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2 (Paragraph[0288]) (S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0311]—This Paragraph [0311] illustrates Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6a stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCallee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6a stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0277]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Callee'sInformation between Host H and Caller's Device. In this embodiment, HostH retrieves the Callee's Information from Callee's Information StorageArea H55b2 (Paragraph [0288]) (S1), and sends the Callee's Informationto Caller's Device (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device receivesthe Callee's Information from Host H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permittedcallee's personal data in Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4(Paragraph [0276]) (S4). CPU 211 stores the callee's calculated GPS datain Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6 (Paragraph [0272])(S5). CPU 211 stores the map data in Callee's Map Data Storage Area20655b8 (Paragraph [0272]) (S6). CPU 211 stores the callee's audio datain Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2a (Paragraph [0274]) (S7).CPU 211 stores the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655b2b (Paragraph [0274]) (S8). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0312]—This Paragraph [0312] illustrates Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655c7 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller'sDevice, which displays the permitted callee's personal data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device retrieves the permitted callee's personal data fromCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 (Paragraph [0276]) (S1). CPU211 then displays the permitted callee's personal data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0313]—This Paragraph [0313] illustrates Map DisplayingSoftware 20655c8 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device, whichdisplays the map representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's calculated GPSdata from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6 (Paragraph[0272]) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data from Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655b8 (Paragraph [0272]) (S2), and arranges on the mapdata the callee's current location icon in accordance with the callee'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the callee's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Callee's Device in the map data.The map with the callee's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0314]—This Paragraph [0314] illustrates Callee's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655c9 stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device,which outputs the callee's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the callee's audio data from Callee's Audio Data Storage Area20655b2a (Paragraph [0274]) (S1). CPU 211 then outputs the caller'saudio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0315]—This Paragraph [0315] illustrates Callee's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10 stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device,which displays the callee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the callee's visual data from Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655b2b (Paragraph [0274]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays thecallee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0316]—<<Shortcut Icon Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0317]—Paragraph [0318] through Paragraph [0330] illustratethe shortcut icon displaying function which displays one or more ofshortcut icons on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. The userof Communication Device 200 can execute the software programs in aconvenient manner by selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) theshortcut icons. The foregoing software programs may be any softwareprograms described in this specification.

Paragraph [0318]—This Paragraph [0318] illustrates the shortcut iconsdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 byimplementing the present function. In this embodiment, three shortcuticons are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), i.e., Shortcut Icon#1, ShortcutIcon#2, and Shortcut Icon#3. The user of Communication Device 200 canexecute the software programs by selecting (e.g., clicking or doubleclicking) one of the shortcut icons. For example, assume that ShortcutIcon#1 represents MS Word 97. By selecting (e.g., clicking or doubleclicking) Shortcut Icon#1, the user can execute MS Word 97 installed inCommunication Device 200 or Host H. Three shortcut icons are illustratedin the present paragraph, however, only for purposes of simplifying theexplanation of the present function. Therefore, as many shortcut iconsequivalent to the number of the software programs described in thisspecification may be displayed on LCD 201, and the correspondingsoftware programs may be executed by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0319]—Paragraph [0319] illustrates the storage area includedin RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Shortcut IconDisplaying Information Storage Area 20659a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described in Paragraph [0320].

Paragraph [0320]—This Paragraph [0320] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Shortcut Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20659a(Paragraph [0319]). In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20659a includes Shortcut Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20659b and Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area20659c. Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20659b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0322]. Shortcut Icon Displaying Software StorageArea 20659c stores the software programs necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0328].

Paragraph [0321]—The data and/or the software programs stored inShortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659c (Paragraph [0320])may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0322]—This Paragraph [0322] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20659b (Paragraph[0320]). In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area20659b includes Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659b1, ShortcutIcon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2, Shortcut Icon Link Data StorageArea 20659b3, and Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4.Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659b1 stores the data describedin Paragraph [0323]. Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2stores the data described in Paragraph [0324]. Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0325].Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0326].

Paragraph [0323]—This Paragraph [0323] illustrates the data stored inShortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659b1 (Paragraph [0322]). Inthis embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659b1 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’.Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores the shortcut icon IDs, and eachshortcut icon ID is the identification of the corresponding shortcuticon image data stored in column ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’. Column‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’ stores the shortcut icon image data, and eachshortcut icon image data is the image data of the shortcut icondisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0318]. In thisembodiment, Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659b1 stores thefollowing data: the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#1’; theshortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and the corresponding shortcut iconimage data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#2’; the shortcut icon ID ‘ShortcutIcon#3’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut IconImage Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#4’.

Paragraph [0324]—This Paragraph [0324] illustrates the data stored inShortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2 (Paragraph [0322]). Inthis embodiment, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores the shortcut icon IDsdescribed hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data’ stores theshortcut icon location data, and each shortcut icon location dataindicates the location displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) in (x,y) format ofthe shortcut icon image data of the corresponding shortcut icon ID. Inthis embodiment, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659b2 storesthe following data: the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon LocationData#1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and the correspondingshortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#2’; theshortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and the corresponding shortcut iconlocation data ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon location data‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#4’.

Paragraph [0325]—This Paragraph [0325] illustrates the data stored inShortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659b3 (Paragraph [0322]). In thisembodiment, Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659b3 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data’. Column‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores the shortcut icon IDs described hereinbefore.Column ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data’ stores the shortcut icon link data, andeach shortcut icon link data represents the location in CommunicationDevice 200 of the software program stored therein represented by theshortcut icon of the corresponding shortcut icon ID. In this embodiment,Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659b3 stores the following data:the shortcut icon ID′ ‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and the corresponding shortcuticon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#1; the shortcut icon ID’‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#2; the shortcut icon ID’ Shortcut Icon#3′ andthe corresponding shortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#3;and the shortcut icon ID’ ‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and the correspondingshortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#4’. The foregoingsoftware program may be any software program described in thisspecification.

Paragraph [0326]—This Paragraph [0326] illustrates the data stored inSelected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4 (Paragraph [0322]). Inthis embodiment, Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4 storesone or more of shortcut icon IDs. Only the shortcut icon image data ofthe shortcut icon IDs stored in Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area20659b4 are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, SelectedShortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4 stores the following data: theshortcut icon IDs ‘Shortcut Icon#1’, ‘Shortcut Icon#2’, and ‘ShortcutIcon#3’, which means that only the shortcut icon image datacorresponding to ‘Shortcut Icon#1’, ‘Shortcut Icon#2’, and ‘ShortcutIcon#3’ are displayed on LCD 201.

Paragraph [0327]—This Paragraph [0328] illustrates the software programsstored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659c(Paragraph [0320]). In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659c stores Shortcut Icon Displaying Software20659c1, Software Executing Software 20659c2, Shortcut Icon LocationData Changing Software 20659c3, and Software Executing Software 20659c4.Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659c1 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0328]. Software Executing Software 20659c2 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0329]. Shortcut IconLocation Data Changing Software 20659c3 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0330]. Software Executing Software 20659c4 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0330].

Paragraph [0328]—This Paragraph [0328] illustrates Shortcut IconDisplaying Software 20659c1 stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20659c of Communication Device 200, which displays theshortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) refers to the shortcuticon IDs stored in Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659b4(Paragraph [0326]) to identify the shortcut icon image data to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the shortcuticon image data of the corresponding shortcut icon IDs identified in S1from Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659b1 (Paragraph [0323])(S2). CPU 211 further retrieves the shortcut icon location data of thecorresponding shortcut icon IDs identified in S1 from Shortcut IconLocation Data Storage Area 20659b2 (Paragraph [0324]) (S3). CPU 211displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) the shortcut icon image data thereafter(S4).

Paragraph [0329]—This Paragraph [0329] illustrates Software ExecutingSoftware 20659c2 stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software StorageArea 20659c of Communication Device 200, which executes thecorresponding software program upon selecting the shortcut icon imagedata displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects the shortcuticon image data displayed on LCD 201 by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenidentifies the shortcut icon ID of the shortcut icon image data selectedin S1 (S2). CPU 211 identifies the shortcut icon link data stored inShortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659b3 (Paragraph [0325]) from theshortcut icon ID identified in S2 (S3), and executes the correspondingsoftware program (S4).

Paragraph [0330]—This Paragraph [0330] illustrates Shortcut IconLocation Data Changing Software 20659c3 stored in Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659c of Communication Device 200,which enables the user of Communication Device 200 to change thelocation of the shortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects theshortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then identifies the shortcut icon ID of the shortcut icon image dataselected in S1 (S2). The user moves the shortcut icon selected in S1 byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S3). CPU 211 then identifies the new location thereof (S4), and updatesthe shortcut icon location data stored in Shortcut Icon Location DataStorage Area 20659b2 (Paragraph [0324]) (S5).

Paragraph [0331]—<<Task Tray Icon Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0332]—Paragraph [0333] through Paragraph [0341] illustratethe task tray icon displaying function which displays one or more oftask tray icons on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. Theuser of Communication Device 200 can identify the software programsexecuted in background in a convenient manner. The foregoing softwareprograms may be any software programs described in this specification.

Paragraph [0333]—This Paragraph [0333] illustrates the task tray iconsdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 byimplementing the present function. In this embodiment, Display Area20160DA includes Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1 which isdisplayed at the lower right portion of LCD 201. Three task tray iconsare displayed Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1, i.e., Task TrayIcon#1, Task Tray Icon#2, and Task Tray Icon#3, by which the user ofCommunication Device 200 can identify the software programs executed inbackground in a convenient manner, i.e., by observing Task Tray IconsDisplay Area 20660DA1. Three task tray icons are illustrated in thepresent paragraph, however, only for purposes of simplifying theexplanation of the present function. Therefore, as many task tray iconsequivalent to the number of the software programs described in thisspecification may be displayed in Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1,and the corresponding software programs executed in background byimplementing the present function.

Paragraph [0334]—This Paragraph [0334] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes TaskTray Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20660a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0335].

Paragraph [0335]—This Paragraph [0335] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Task Tray Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20660a(Paragraph [0334]). In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20660a includes Task Tray Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20660b and Task Tray Icon Displaying Software Storage Area20660c. Task Tray Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20660b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0336]. Task Tray Icon Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20660c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0340].

Paragraph [0336]—This Paragraph [0336] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Task Tray Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20660b(Paragraph [0335]). In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20660b includes Task Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area20660b1, Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660b3, and SelectedTask Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4. Task Tray Icon Image DataStorage Area 20660b1 stores the data described in Paragraph [0337]. TaskTray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660b3 stores the data described inParagraph [0338]. Selected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4stores the data described in Paragraph [0339].

Paragraph [0337]—This Paragraph [0337] illustrates the data stored inTask Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660b1 (Paragraph [0336]). Inthis embodiment, Task Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660b1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ and ‘Task Tray IconImage Data’. Column ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ stores the task tray icon IDs,and each task tray icon ID is the identification of the correspondingtask tray icon image data stored in column ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data’.Column ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data’ stores the task tray icon image data,and each task tray icon image data is the image data of the task trayicon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0333]. Inthis embodiment, Task Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660b1 storesthe following data: the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#1’ and thecorresponding task tray icon image data ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data#1’;the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#2’ and the corresponding task trayicon image data ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data#2’; the task tray icon ID‘Task Tray Icon#3’ and the corresponding task tray icon image data ‘TaskTray Icon Image Data#3’; and the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#4’and the corresponding task tray icon image data ‘Task Tray Icon ImageData#4’.

Paragraph [0338]—This Paragraph [0338] illustrates the data stored inTask Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660b3 (Paragraph [0336]). Inthis embodiment, Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660b3 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ and ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data’.Column ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ stores the task tray icon IDs describedhereinbefore. Column ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data’ stores the task trayicon link data, and each task tray icon link data represents thelocation in Communication Device 200 of the software program storedtherein represented by the task tray icon of the corresponding task trayicon ID. In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area20660b3 stores the following data: the task tray icon ID ‘Task TrayIcon#1’ and the corresponding task tray icon link data ‘Task Tray IconLink Data#1; the task tray icon ID’ ‘Task Tray Icon#2’ and thecorresponding task tray icon link data ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data#2; thetask tray icon ID’ Task Tray Icon#3′ and the corresponding task trayicon link data ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data#3; and the task tray icon ID’‘Task Tray Icon#4’ and the corresponding task tray icon link data ‘TaskTray Icon Link Data#4’. The foregoing software programs may be of anysoftware programs described in this specification.

Paragraph [0339]—This Paragraph [0339] illustrates the data stored inSelected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4 (Paragraph [0336]). Inthis embodiment, Selected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4stores one or more of task tray icon IDs. Only the task tray icon imagedata of the task tray icon IDs stored in Selected Task Tray Icon DataStorage Area 20660b4 are displayed in Task Tray Icons Display Area20660DA1 (Paragraph [0333]). In this embodiment, Selected Task Tray IconData Storage Area 20660b4 stores the following data: the task tray iconIDs ‘Task Tray Icon#1’, ‘Task Tray Icon#2’, and ‘Task Tray Icon#3’,which means that only the task tray icon image data corresponding to‘Task Tray Icon#1’, ‘Task Tray Icon#2’, and ‘Task Tray Icon#3’ aredisplayed in Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1.

Paragraph [0340]—This Paragraph [0340] illustrates the software programsstored in Task Tray Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20660c(Paragraph [0335]). In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20660c stores Software Executing Software 20660c2and Software Executing Software 20660c4. Software Executing Software20660c2 is the software program described in Paragraph [0341]. SoftwareExecuting Software 20660c4 is the software program described inParagraph [0341].

Paragraph [0341]—This Paragraph [0341] illustrates Software ExecutingSoftware 20660c2 stored in Task Tray Icon Displaying Software StorageArea 20660c of Communication Device 200, which executes thecorresponding software program in background and displays thecorresponding task tray icon image data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) refers toSelected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660b4 (Paragraph [0339])(S1) to identify the task tray IDs stored therein (S2). CPU 211identifies the task tray icon link data stored in Task Tray Icon LinkData Storage Area 20660b3 (Paragraph [0338]) of the corresponding tasktray icon IDs identified in S2 (S3), and executes the correspondingsoftware program (S4). CPU 211 then retrieves the task tray icon imagedata of the corresponding task tray icon IDs identified in S2 from TaskTray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660b1 (Paragraph [0337]) (S5). CPU211 displays the task tray icon image data in Task Tray Icons DisplayArea 20660DA1 (Paragraph [0333]) thereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0342]—<<OS Updating Function>>

Paragraph [0343]—Paragraph [0344] through Paragraph [0404] illustratethe OS updating function which updates the operating system ofCommunication Device 200 in a wireless fashion. In other words,Communication Device 200 downloads the portion of the operating systemof the latest version from Host H (Paragraph [0025]) via Antenna 218(FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0344]—This Paragraph [0344] illustrates the storage areasincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesOperating System 20663OS of which the data stored therein are describedin Paragraph [0345] and Paragraph [0345], and OS Updating InformationStorage Area 20663a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described in Paragraph [0346].

Paragraph [0345]—This Paragraph [0345] illustrates the data stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0344]). In this embodiment,Operating System 20663OS includes Battery Controller 20663OSa, CCD UnitController 20663OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc, IndicatorController 20663OSd, Input Device Controller 20663OSe, LCD Controller20663OSf, LED Controller 20663OSg, Memory Card Interface Controller20663OSh, Microphone Controller 20663OSi, Photometer Controller20663OSj, RAM Controller 20663OSk, ROM Controller 20663OSl, SignalProcessor Controller 20663OSm, Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn,Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo, Speaker Controller 20663OSp, VibratorController 20663OSq, Video Processor Controller 20663OSr, WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs, Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt,Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu, Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSv, Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw, and WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSx. Battery Controller 20663OSa is acontroller which controls Battery 230 (not shown). CCD Unit Controller20663OSb is a controller which controls CCD Unit 214 (not shown). FlashLight Unit Controller 20663OSc is a controller which controls FlashLight Unit 220 (not shown). Indicator Controller 20663OSd is acontroller which controls Indicator 212 (not shown). Input DeviceController 20663OSe is a controller which controls Input Device 210 (notshown). LCD Controller 20663OSf is a controller which controls LCD 201(not shown). LED Controller 20663OSg is a controller which controls LED219 (not shown). Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh is acontroller which controls Memory Card Interface 221 (not shown).Microphone Controller 20663OSi is a controller which controls Microphone215 (not shown). Photometer Controller 20663OSj is a controller whichcontrols Photometer 232 (not shown). RAM Controller 20663OSk is acontroller which controls RAM 206 (not shown). ROM Controller 20663OS1is a controller which controls ROM 207 (not shown). Signal ProcessorController 20663OSm is a controller which controls Signal Processor 205(not shown). Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn is a controller whichcontrols Signal Processor 208 (not shown). Solar Panel Controller20663OSo is a controller which controls Solar Panel 229 (not shown).Speaker Controller 20663OSp is a controller which controls Speaker 216L(not shown). Vibrator Controller 20663OSq is a controller which controlsVibrator 217 (not shown). Video Processor Controller 20663OSr is acontroller which controls Video Processor 202 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs is a controller which controls WirelessReceiver 224 (not shown). Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt is acontroller which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSu is a controller which controls WirelessReceiver 226 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv is acontroller which controls Wireless Transmitter 222 (not shown). WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSw is a controller which controls WirelessTransmitter 223 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx isa controller which controls Wireless Transmitter 227 (not shown). Forthe avoidance of doubt, the data stored in Operating System 20663OS areillustrative, and other types of data, which are updated by implementingthe present function, are also stored therein, such as DLLs, drivers,security implementing program.

Paragraph [0346]—This Paragraph [0346] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OS Updating Information Storage Area 20663a (Paragraph[0344]). In this embodiment, OS Updating Information Storage Area 20663aincludes OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663b and OS Updating SoftwareStorage Area 20663c. OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0348]. OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0350]and Paragraph [0350].

Paragraph [0347]—The data and/or the software programs stored in OSUpdating Software Storage Area 20663c (Paragraph [0346]) may bedownloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0348]—This Paragraph [0348] illustrates the storage areaincluded in OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663b (Paragraph [0346]). Inthis embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663b includes OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1. OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1stores the data described in Paragraph [0349] and Paragraph [0349].

Paragraph [0349]—This Paragraph [0349] illustrates the data stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0348]). In thisembodiment, OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 includes BatteryController Version Data 20663b1a, CCD Unit Controller Version Data20663b1b, Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c, IndicatorController Version Data 20663b1d, Input Device Controller Version Data20663b1e, LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f, LED Controller VersionData 20663b1g, Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h,Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i, Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663b1j, RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k, ROMController Version Data 20663b11, Signal Processor Controller VersionData 20663b1m, Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n, SolarPanel Controller Version Data 20663b1o, Speaker Controller Version Data20663b1p, Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q, Video ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1r, Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1s, Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t,Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u, Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1v, Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1x. Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a is the version datarepresenting the current version of Battery Controller 20663OSa(Paragraph [0345]). CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b is theversion data representing the current version of CCD Unit Controller20663OSb (Paragraph [0345]). Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data20663b1c is the version data representing the current version of FlashLight Unit Controller 20663OSc (Paragraph [0345]). Indicator ControllerVersion Data 20663b1d is the version data representing the currentversion of Indicator Controller 20663OSd (Paragraph [0345]). InputDevice Controller Version Data 20663b1e is the version data representingthe current version of Input Device Controller 20663OSe (Paragraph[0345]). LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f is the version datarepresenting the current version of LCD Controller 20663OSf (Paragraph[0345]). LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g is the version datarepresenting the current version of LED Controller 20663OSg (Paragraph[0345]). Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h is theversion data representing the current version of Memory Card InterfaceController 20663OSh (Paragraph [0345]). Microphone Controller VersionData 20663b1i is the version data representing the current version ofMicrophone Controller 20663OSi (Paragraph [0345]). Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663b1j is the version data representing the currentversion of Photometer Controller 20663OSj (Paragraph [0345]). RAMController Version Data 20663b1k is the version data representing thecurrent version of RAM Controller 20663OSk (Paragraph [0345]). ROMController Version Data 20663b1l is the version data representing thecurrent version of ROM Controller 20663OS1 (Paragraph [0345]). SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1m is the version datarepresenting the current version of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm(Paragraph [0345]). Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n isthe version data representing the current version of Signal ProcessorController 20663OSn (Paragraph [0345]). Solar Panel Controller VersionData 20663b1o is the version data representing the current version ofSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo (Paragraph [0345]). Speaker ControllerVersion Data 20663b1p is the version data representing the currentversion of Speaker Controller 20663OSp (Paragraph [0345]). VibratorController Version Data 20663b1q is the version data representing thecurrent version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq (Paragraph [0345]).Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r is the version datarepresenting the current version of Video Processor Controller 20663OSr(Paragraph [0345]). Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1sthe version data representing the current version of Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSs (Paragraph [0345]). Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1t is the version data representing the currentversion of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph [0345]).Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u is the version datarepresenting the current version of Wireless Receiver Controller20663OSu (Paragraph [0345]). Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData 20663b1v is the version data representing the current version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv (Paragraph [0345]). WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w is the version datarepresenting the current version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSw (Paragraph [0345]). Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData 20663b1x is the version data representing the current version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx (Paragraph [0345]). Here, theversion data is composed of numeric data, such as ‘1’, ‘2’, and ‘3’,wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’, ‘2’ represents version ‘2.0’, and‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’.

Paragraph [0350]—This Paragraph [0350] illustrates the software programsstored in OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663c (Paragraph [0346]).In this embodiment, OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663c storesBattery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a, CCD Unit ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1b, Flash Light Unit Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1c, Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663c1d,Input Device Controller Updating Software 20663c1e, LCD ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1f, LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1g,Memory Card Interface Controller Updating Software 20663c1h, MicrophoneController Updating Software 20663c1i, Photometer Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1j, RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k, ROMController Updating Software 20663c1l, Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1m, Signal Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1n, Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663c1o,Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p, Vibrator ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1q, Video Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1r, Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1s,Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1t, WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1u, Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software 20663c1v, Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1x. Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0357] and Paragraph [0358]. CCDUnit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0359] and Paragraph [0360]. Flash Light UnitController Updating Software 20663c1c is the software program describedin Paragraph [0361] and Paragraph [0362]. Indicator Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1d is the software program described in Paragraph [0363]and Paragraph [0364]. Input Device Controller Updating Software 20663c1eis the software program described in Paragraph [0365] and Paragraph[0366]. LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0367] and Paragraph [0368]. LEDController Updating Software 20663c1g is the software program describedin Paragraph [0369] and Paragraph [0370]. Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software 20663c1h is the software program describedin Paragraph [0371] and Paragraph [0372]. Microphone Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1i is the software program described in Paragraph [0373]and Paragraph [0374]. Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663c1jis the software program described in Paragraph [0375] and Paragraph[0376]. RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0377] and Paragraph [0378]. ROMController Updating Software 20663c11 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0379] and Paragraph [0380]. Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1m is the software program described inParagraph [0381] and Paragraph [0382]. Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1n is the software program described inParagraph [0383] and Paragraph [0384]. Solar Panel Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1o is the software program described in Paragraph andParagraph [0386]. Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0387] and Paragraph [0388].Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0389] and Paragraph [0390]. Video ProcessorController Updating Software 20663c1r is the software program describedin Paragraph [0391] and Paragraph [0392]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1s is the software program described inParagraph [0393] and Paragraph [0394]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1t is the software program described inParagraph and Paragraph [0396]. Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1u is the software program described in Paragraph [0397]and Paragraph [0398]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1v is the software program described in Paragraph [0399] andParagraph [0400]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1w is the software program described in Paragraph [0401] andParagraph [0402]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1x is the software program described in Paragraph [0403] andParagraph [0404].

Paragraph [0351]—This Paragraph [0351] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host Hincludes Operating System H63OS of which the data stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0352] and Paragraph [0352], and OS UpdatingInformation Storage Area H63a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0353].

Paragraph [0352]—This Paragraph [0352] illustrates the data stored inOperating System H63OS (Paragraph [0351]). In this embodiment, OperatingSystem H63OS includes Battery Controller H63OSa, CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc, Indicator Controller H63OSd,Input Device Controller H63OSe, LCD Controller H63OSf, LED ControllerH63OSg, Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh, Microphone ControllerH63OSi, Photometer Controller H63OSj, RAM Controller H63OSk, ROMController H63OSl, Signal Processor Controller H63OSm, Signal ProcessorController H63OSn, Solar Panel Controller H63OSo, Speaker ControllerH63OSp, Vibrator Controller H63OSq, Video Processor Controller H63OSr,Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs, Wireless Receiver ControllerH63OSt, Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu, Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv, Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw, and WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSx. Battery Controller H63OSa is thecontroller of the latest version which controls Battery 230 (not shown).CCD Unit Controller H63OSb is the controller of the latest version whichcontrols CCD Unit 214 (not shown). Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc isthe controller of the latest version which controls Flash Light Unit 220(not shown). Indicator Controller H63OSd is the controller of the latestversion which controls Indicator 212 (not shown). Input DeviceController H63OSe is the controller of the latest version which controlsInput Device 210 (not shown). LCD Controller H63OSf is the controller ofthe latest version which controls LCD 201 (not shown). LED ControllerH63OSg is the controller of the latest version which controls LED 219(not shown). Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh is the controllerof the latest version which controls Memory Card Interface 221 (notshown). Microphone Controller H63OSi is the controller of the latestversion which controls Microphone 215 (not shown). Photometer ControllerH63OSj is the controller of the latest version which controls Photometer232 (not shown). RAM Controller H63OSk is the controller of the latestversion which controls Host H (not shown). ROM Controller H63OSl is thecontroller of the latest version which controls ROM 207 (not shown).Signal Processor Controller H63OSm is the controller of the latestversion which controls Signal Processor 205 (not shown). SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Signal Processor 208 (not shown). Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo is the controller of the latest version which controls SolarPanel 229 (not shown). Speaker Controller H63OSp is the controller ofthe latest version which controls Speaker 216L (not shown). VibratorController H63OSq is the controller of the latest version which controlsVibrator 217 (not shown). Video Processor Controller H63OSr is thecontroller of the latest version which controls Video Processor 202 (notshown). Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs is the controller of thelatest version which controls Wireless Receiver 224 (not shown).Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt is the controller of the latestversion which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu is the controller of the latest version whichcontrols Wireless Receiver 226 (not shown). Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv is the controller of the latest version which controlsWireless Transmitter 222 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSw is the controller of the latest version which controls WirelessTransmitter 223 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx isthe controller of the latest version which controls Wireless Transmitter227 (not shown). The data stored in Operating System Storage Area H63OSare updated periodically. For the avoidance of doubt, the data stored inOperating System H63OS are illustrative, and other types of data, whichare utilized to update Operating System H63OS of Communication Device200 by implementing the present function, are also stored therein, suchas DLLs, drivers, security implementing program. The data stored inOperating System H63OS are updated periodically thereby the data arealways of the latest version.

Paragraph [0353]—This Paragraph [0353] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OS Updating Information Storage Area H63a (Paragraph[0351]). In this embodiment, OS Updating Information Storage Area H63aincludes OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b and OS Updating SoftwareStorage Area H63c. OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H(Paragraph [0025]), such as the ones described in Paragraph [0354]. OSUpdating Software Storage Area H63c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described in Paragraph [0356] and Paragraph [0356].

Paragraph [0354]—This Paragraph [0354] illustrates the storage areaincluded in OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b (Paragraph [0353]). Inthis embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b includes OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1. OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 stores thedata described in Paragraph [0355] and Paragraph [0355].

Paragraph [0355]—This Paragraph [0355] illustrates the data stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0354]). In this embodiment,OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 includes Battery Controller VersionData H63b1a, CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b, Flash Light UnitController Version Data H63b1c, Indicator Controller Version DataH63b1d, Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e, LCD ControllerVersion Data H63b1f, LED Controller Version Data H63b1g, Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data H63b1h, Microphone Controller VersionData H63b1i, Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j, RAM ControllerVersion Data H63b1k, ROM Controller Version Data H63b1l, SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1m, Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data H63b1n, Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o, SpeakerController Version Data H63b1p, Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q,Video Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r, Wireless ReceiverController Version Data H63b1s, Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData H63b1t, Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u, WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v, Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1w, and Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63b1x. Battery Controller Version Data H63b1a is theversion data representing the latest version of Battery ControllerH63OSa (Paragraph [0352]). CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b isthe version data representing the latest version of CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb (Paragraph [0352]). Flash Light Unit Controller Version DataH63b1c is the version data representing the latest version of FlashLight Unit Controller H63OSc (Paragraph [0352]). Indicator ControllerVersion Data H63b1d is the version data representing the latest versionof Indicator Controller H63OSd (Paragraph [0352]). Input DeviceController Version Data H63b1e is the version data representing thelatest version of Input Device Controller H63OSe (Paragraph [0352]). LCDController Version Data H63b1f is the version data representing thelatest version of LCD Controller H63OSf (Paragraph [0352]). LEDController Version Data H63b1g is the version data representing thelatest version of LED Controller H63OSg (Paragraph [0352]). Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data H63b1h is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Memory Card Interface ControllerH63OSh (Paragraph [0352]). Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i isthe version data representing the latest version of MicrophoneController H63OSi (Paragraph [0352]). Photometer Controller Version DataH63b1j is the version data representing the latest version of PhotometerController H63OSj (Paragraph [0352]). RAM Controller Version Data H63b1kis the version data representing the latest version of RAM ControllerH63OSk (Paragraph [0352]). ROM Controller Version Data H63b1l is theversion data representing the latest version of ROM Controller H63OSl(Paragraph [0352]). Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m isthe version data representing the latest version of Signal ProcessorController H63OSm (Paragraph [0352]). Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data H63b1n is the version data representing the latest versionof Signal Processor Controller H63OSn (Paragraph [0352]). Solar PanelController Version Data H63b1o is the version data representing thelatest version of Solar Panel Controller H63OSo (Paragraph [0352]).Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p is the version data representingthe latest version of Speaker Controller H63OSp (Paragraph [0352]).Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q is the version data representingthe latest version of Vibrator Controller H63OSq (Paragraph [0352]).Video Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Video Processor Controller H63OSr(Paragraph [0352]). Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s isthe version data representing the latest version of Wireless ReceiverController H63OSs (Paragraph [0352]). Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1t is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt (Paragraph [0352]). WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data H63b1u is the version data representingthe latest version of Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu (Paragraph[0352]). Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v is theversion data representing the latest version of Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv (Paragraph [0352]). Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63b1w is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw (Paragraph [0352]). WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSx (Paragraph [0352]). Here, the version data is composed of numericdata, such as ‘1’, ‘2’, and ‘3’, wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’,‘2’ represents version ‘2.0’, and ‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’. The datastored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 are updated periodically.

Paragraph [0356]—This Paragraph [0356] illustrates the software programsstored in OS Updating Software Storage Area H63c (Paragraph [0353]). Inthis embodiment, OS Updating Software Storage Area H63c stores BatteryController Updating Software H63c1a, CCD Unit Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1b, Flash Light Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1c,Indicator Controller Updating Software H63c1d, Input Device ControllerUpdating Software H63c1e, LCD Controller Updating Software H63c1f, LEDController Updating Software H63c1g, Memory Card Interface ControllerUpdating Software H63c1h, Microphone Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1i, Photometer Controller Updating Software H63c1j, RAM ControllerUpdating Software H63c1k, ROM Controller Updating Software H63c1l,Signal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1m, Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1n, Solar Panel Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1o, Speaker Controller Updating Software H63c1p, VibratorController Updating Software H63c1q, Video Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1r, Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1s,Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1t, Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1u, Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software H63c1g, Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1x. Battery Controller Updating Software H63c1a is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0357] and Paragraph [0358]. CCD UnitController Updating Software H63c1b is the software program described inParagraph [0359] and Paragraph [0360]. Flash Light Unit ControllerUpdating Software H63c1c is the software program described in Paragraph[0361] and Paragraph [0362]. Indicator Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1d is the software program described in Paragraph [0363] andParagraph [0364]. Input Device Controller Updating Software H63c1e isthe software program described in Paragraph [0365] and Paragraph [0366].LCD Controller Updating Software H63c1f is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0367] and Paragraph [0368]. LED ControllerUpdating Software H63c1g is the software program described in Paragraph[0369] and Paragraph [0370]. Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1h is the software program described in Paragraph [0371]and Paragraph [0372]. Microphone Controller Updating Software H63c1i isthe software program described in Paragraph [0373] and Paragraph [0374].Photometer Controller Updating Software H63c1j is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0375] and Paragraph [0376]. RAM ControllerUpdating Software H63c1k is the software program described in Paragraph[0377] and Paragraph [0378]. ROM Controller Updating Software H63c1l isthe software program described in Paragraph [0379] and Paragraph [0380].Signal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1m is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0381] and Paragraph [0382]. SignalProcessor Controller Updating Software H63c1n is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0383] and Paragraph [0384]. Solar PanelController Updating Software H63c1o is the software program described inParagraph [0385] and Paragraph [0386]. Speaker Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1p is the software program described in Paragraph andParagraph [0388]. Vibrator Controller Updating Software H63c1q is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0389] and Paragraph [0390].Video Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1r is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0391] and Paragraph [0392]. WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software H63c1s is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0393] and Paragraph [0394]. Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1t is the software program described inParagraph [0395] and Paragraph [0396]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software H63c1u is the software program described in Paragraph[0397] and Paragraph [0398]. Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1v is the software program described in Paragraph [0399]and Paragraph [0400]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1w is the software program described in Paragraph [0401] andParagraph [0402]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1x is the software program described in Paragraph [0403] andParagraph [0404]. The foregoing software programs are automaticallyimplemented periodically or implemented manually by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.

Paragraph [0357]—This Paragraph [0357] illustrates Battery ControllerUpdating Software H63c1a (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Battery Controller 20663OSastored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesBattery Controller Version Data 20663b1a (Paragraph [0349]) with BatteryController Version Data H63b1a stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects inS3 that Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Battery Controller H63OSa,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Battery Controller H63OSa from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Battery Controller H63OSa as Battery Controller 20663OSa inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version ofBattery Controller 20663OSa (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0358]—This Paragraph [0358] illustrates another embodiment ofBattery Controller Updating Software H63c1a (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update BatteryController 20663OSa stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Battery Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Battery ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send Battery Controller Version DataH63b1a (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves Battery Controller VersionData H63b1a from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingBattery Controller Version Data H63b1a from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Battery Controller Version Data H63b1a with Battery ControllerVersion Data 20663b1a stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewBattery Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Battery Controller Sending Request is a request to sendBattery Controller H63OSa (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Battery Controller H63OSa(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Battery ControllerH63OSa from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Battery Controller H63OSa asBattery Controller 20663OSa in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Battery Controller 20663OSa (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0359]—This Paragraph [0359] illustrates CCD Unit ControllerUpdating Software H63c1b (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update CCD Unit Controller 20663OSbstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesCCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b (Paragraph [0349]) with CCDUnit Controller Version Data H63b1b stored in OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves CCD UnitController H63OSb, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller H63OSbfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores CCD Unit Controller H63OSb as CCD UnitController 20663OSb in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0360]—This Paragraph [0360] illustrates another embodiment ofCCD Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1b (Paragraph [0356]) of HostH (Paragraph [0025]) and CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update CCD UnitController 20663OSb stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a CCD Unit Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the CCD Unit ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send CCD Unit Controller Version DataH63b1b (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves CCD Unit Controller VersionData H63b1b from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving CCDUnit Controller Version Data H63b1b from Host H (S3), CPU 211 comparesCCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b with CCD Unit Controller VersionData 20663b1b stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New CCD Unit ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New CCDUnit Controller Sending Request is a request to send CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.Host H retrieves CCD Unit Controller H63OSb (Paragraph [0352]), which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S6). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller H63OSb from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores CCD Unit Controller H63OSb as CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of CCDUnit Controller 20663OSb (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0361]—This Paragraph [0361] illustrates Flash Light UnitController Updating Software H63c1c (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Flash Light Unit Controller Updating Software20663c1c (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateFlash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Flash Light UnitController Version Data 20663b1c from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Flash LightUnit Controller Version Data 20663b1c (Paragraph [0349]) with FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1cof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves FlashLight Unit Controller H63OSc, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Flash LightUnit Controller H63OSc from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Flash Light UnitController H63OSc as Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Flash LightUnit Controller 20663OSc (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0362]—This Paragraph [0362] illustrates another embodiment ofFlash Light Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1c (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Flash Light Unit Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1c (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a FlashLight Unit Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Flash Light Unit Controller Update Request is a request tosend Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c (Paragraph [0355])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller Version DataH63b1c from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c with FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Flash Light UnitController Version Data 20663b1c of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Flash Light Unit Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Flash LightUnit Controller Sending Request is a request to send Flash Light UnitController H63OSc (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Flash Light UnitController H63OSc from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Flash Light UnitController H63OSc as Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of Flash LightUnit Controller 20663OSc (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0363]—This Paragraph [0363] illustrates Indicator ControllerUpdating Software H63c1d (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663c1d (Paragraph [0350])of Communication Device 200, which update Indicator Controller 20663OSdstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesIndicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d (Paragraph [0349]) withIndicator Controller Version Data H63b1d stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesIndicator Controller H63OSd, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving IndicatorController H63OSd from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Indicator ControllerH63OSd as Indicator Controller 20663OSd in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Indicator Controller2066305d (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0364]—This Paragraph [0364] illustrates another embodiment ofIndicator Controller Updating Software H63c1d (Paragraph [0356]) of HostH (Paragraph [0025]) and Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663c1d(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update IndicatorController 20663OSd stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Indicator Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the IndicatorController Update Request is a request to send Indicator ControllerVersion Data H63b1d (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves IndicatorController Version Data H63b1d from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d withIndicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Indicator ControllerVersion Data 20663b1d of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Indicator Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Indicator Controller SendingRequest is a request to send Indicator Controller H63OSd (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesIndicator Controller H63OSd (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Indicator Controller H63OSd from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesIndicator Controller H63OSd as Indicator Controller 20663OSd inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofIndicator Controller 20663OSd (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0365]—This Paragraph [0365] illustrates Input DeviceController Updating Software H63c1e (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Input Device Controller Updating Software20663c1e (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateInput Device Controller 20663OSe stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Input DeviceController Version Data 20663b1e from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Input DeviceController Version Data 20663b1e (Paragraph [0349]) with Input DeviceController Version Data H63b1e stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects inS3 that Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Input DeviceController H63OSe, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Input Device ControllerH63OSe from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Input Device Controller H63OSeas Input Device Controller 20663OSe in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Input Device Controller20663OSe (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0366]—This Paragraph [0366] illustrates another embodiment ofInput Device Controller Updating Software H63c1e (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Input Device Controller Updating Software20663c1e (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateInput Device Controller 20663OSe stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Input Device ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Input DeviceController Update Request is a request to send Input Device ControllerVersion Data H63b1e (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves Input DeviceController Version Data H63b1e from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e withInput Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Input Device ControllerVersion Data 20663b1e of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Input Device Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Input Device Controller SendingRequest is a request to send Input Device Controller H63OSe (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesInput Device Controller H63OSe (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Input Device Controller H63OSe from Host H (S7), CPU 211stores Input Device Controller H63OSe as Input Device Controller20663OSe in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The oldversion of Input Device Controller 20663OSe (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0367]—This Paragraph [0367] illustrates LCD ControllerUpdating Software H63c1f (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update LCD Controller 20663OSf stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares LCDController Version Data 20663b1f (Paragraph [0349]) with LCD ControllerVersion Data H63b1f stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves LCD Controller H63OSf, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving LCD Controller H63OSf from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores LCDController H63OSf as LCD Controller 20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of LCD Controller 20663OSf(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0368]—This Paragraph [0368] illustrates another embodiment ofLCD Controller Updating Software H63c1f (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update LCDController 20663OSf stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LCD Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the LCD ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send LCD Controller Version Data H63b1f(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LCD Controller Version DataH63b1f from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LCDController Version Data H63b1f from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LCDController Version Data H63b1f with LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1fstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatLCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New LCD Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New LCD Controller SendingRequest is a request to send LCD Controller H63OSf (Paragraph [0352])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves LCDController H63OSf (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving LCDController H63OSf from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores LCD Controller H63OSfas LCD Controller 20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of LCD Controller 20663OSf (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0369]—This Paragraph [0369] illustrates LED ControllerUpdating Software H63c1g (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1g (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update LED Controller 20663OSg stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares LEDController Version Data 20663b1g (Paragraph [0349]) with LED ControllerVersion Data H63b1g stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves LED Controller H63OSg, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving LED Controller H63OSg from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores LEDController H63OSg as LED Controller 20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of LED Controller 20663OSg(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0370]—This Paragraph [0370] illustrates another embodiment ofLED Controller Updating Software H63c1g (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1g(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update LEDController 20663OSg stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LED Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the LED ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send LED Controller Version Data H63b1g(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LED Controller Version DataH63b1g from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LEDController Version Data H63b1g from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LEDController Version Data H63b1g with LED Controller Version Data 20663b1gstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatLED Controller Version Data 20663b1g of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New LED Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New LED Controller SendingRequest is a request to send LED Controller H63OSg (Paragraph [0352])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves LEDController H63OSg (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving LEDController H63OSg from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores LED Controller H63OSgas LED Controller 20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of LED Controller 20663OSg (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0371]—This Paragraph [0371] illustrates Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software H63c1h (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1h (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesMemory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data20663b1h (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h(Paragraph [0349]) with Memory Card Interface Controller Version DataH63b1h stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data 20663b1h of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Memory Card Interface ControllerH63OSh, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShas Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Memory Card InterfaceController 20663OSh (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0372]—This Paragraph [0372] illustrates another embodiment ofMemory Card Interface Controller Updating Software H63c1h (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software 20663c1h (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Memory Card Interface Controller20663OSh stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 sends a Memory Card Interface Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Memory CardInterface Controller Update Request is a request to send Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data H63b1h (Paragraph [0355]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h from OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the datato Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Memory Card InterfaceController Version Data H63b1h from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares MemoryCard Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h with Memory Card InterfaceController Version Data 20663b1h stored in OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assumingthat CPU211 detects in S4 that Memory Card Interface Controller VersionData 20663b1h of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211sends a New Memory Card Interface Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Memory Card Interface ControllerSending Request is a request to send Memory Card Interface ControllerH63OSh (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.Host H retrieves Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh (Paragraph[0352]), which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S6). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShas Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of Memory Card InterfaceController 20663OSh (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0373]—This Paragraph [0373] illustrates Microphone ControllerUpdating Software H63c1i (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663c1i (Paragraph [0350])of Communication Device 200, which update Microphone Controller 20663OSistored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Microphone Controller Version Data20663b1i (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i (Paragraph [0349])with Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesMicrophone Controller H63OSi, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving MicrophoneController H63OSi from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Microphone ControllerH63OSi as Microphone Controller 20663OSi in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Microphone Controller20663OSi (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0374]—This Paragraph [0374] illustrates another embodiment ofMicrophone Controller Updating Software H63c1i (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Microphone Controller Updating Software20663c1i (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateMicrophone Controller 20663OSi stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Microphone ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the MicrophoneController Update Request is a request to send Microphone ControllerVersion Data H63b1i (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves MicrophoneController Version Data H63b1i from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i withMicrophone Controller Version Data 20663b1i stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Microphone ControllerVersion Data 20663b1i of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Microphone Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Microphone Controller SendingRequest is a request to send Microphone Controller H63OSi (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesMicrophone Controller H63OSi (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Microphone Controller H63OSi from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesMicrophone Controller H63OSi as Microphone Controller 20663OSi inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofMicrophone Controller 20663OSi (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0375]—This Paragraph [0375] illustrates Photometer ControllerUpdating Software H63c1j (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663c1j (Paragraph [0350])of Communication Device 200, which update Photometer Controller 20663OSjstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Photometer Controller Version Data20663b1j (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j (Paragraph [0349])with Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesPhotometer Controller H63OSj, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving PhotometerController H63OSj from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Photometer ControllerH63OSj as Photometer Controller 20663OSj in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Photometer Controller20663OSj (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0376]—This Paragraph [0376] illustrates another embodiment ofPhotometer Controller Updating Software H63c1j (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Photometer Controller Updating Software20663c1j (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updatePhotometer Controller 20663OSj stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Photometer ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the PhotometerController Update Request is a request to send Photometer ControllerVersion Data H63b1j (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves PhotometerController Version Data H63b1j from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j withPhotometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663b1j of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Photometer Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Photometer Controller SendingRequest is a request to send Photometer Controller H63OSj (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesPhotometer Controller H63OSj (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Photometer Controller H63OSj from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesPhotometer Controller H63OSj as Photometer Controller 20663OSj inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofPhotometer Controller 20663OSj (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0377]—This Paragraph [0377] illustrates RAM ControllerUpdating Software H63c1k (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update RAM Controller 20663OSk stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares RAMController Version Data 20663b1k (Paragraph [0349]) with RAM ControllerVersion Data H63b1k stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves RAM Controller H63OSk, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving RAM Controller H63OSk from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores RAMController H63OSk as RAM Controller 20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of RAM Controller 20663OSk(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0378]—This Paragraph [0378] illustrates another embodiment ofRAM Controller Updating Software H63c1k (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update RAMController 20663OSk stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a RAM Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the RAM ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send RAM Controller Version Data H63b1k(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves RAM Controller Version DataH63b1k from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving RAMController Version Data H63b1k from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares RAMController Version Data H63b1k with RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1kstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatRAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New RAM Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New RAM Controller SendingRequest is a request to send RAM Controller H63OSk (Paragraph [0352])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves RAMController H63OSk (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving RAMController H63OSk from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores RAM Controller H63OSkas RAM Controller 20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of RAM Controller 20663OSk (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0379]—This Paragraph [0379] illustrates ROM ControllerUpdating Software H63c1l (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1l (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update ROM Controller 20663OS1 stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares ROMController Version Data 20663b1l (Paragraph [0349]) with ROM ControllerVersion Data H63b1l stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves ROM Controller H63OS1, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving ROM Controller H63OS1 from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores ROMController H63OS1 as ROM Controller 20663OS1 in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of ROM Controller 20663OS1(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0380]—This Paragraph [0380] illustrates another embodiment ofROM Controller Updating Software H63c1l (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1l(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update ROMController 20663OS1 stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a ROM Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the ROM ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send ROM Controller Version Data H63b1l(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves ROM Controller Version DataH63b1l from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving ROMController Version Data H63b1l from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares ROMController Version Data H63b1l with ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1lstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New ROM Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New ROM Controller SendingRequest is a request to send ROM Controller H63OS1 (Paragraph [0352])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves ROMController H63OS1 (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving ROMController H63OS1 from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores ROM Controller H63OS1as ROM Controller 20663OS1 in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of ROM Controller 20663OS1 (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0381]—This Paragraph [0381] illustrates Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1m (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1m (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSignal Processor Controller 20663OSm stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1m from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1m (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1m (Paragraph [0349]) withSignal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming thatHost H detects in S3 that Signal Processor Controller Version Data20663b1m of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Signal Processor Controller H630Sm, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller H630Sm from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Signal Processor Controller H630Sm as Signal Processor Controller20663OSm in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0382]—This Paragraph [0382] illustrates another embodiment ofSignal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1m (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1m (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a SignalProcessor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Signal Processor Controller Update Request is a request tosend Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m (Paragraph [0355])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version DataH63b1m from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1m from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m with SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1m stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1m of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New SignalProcessor Controller Sending Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller H630Sm (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Signal Processor ControllerH63OSm (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofSignal Processor Controller 20663OSm (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0383]—This Paragraph [0383] illustrates Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1n (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1n (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSignal Processor Controller 20663OSn stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1n from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1n (Paragraph [0349]) withSignal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming thatHost H detects in S3 that Signal Processor Controller Version Data20663b1n of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Signal Processor Controller H63OSn, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller H63OSn from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Signal Processor Controller H63OSn as Signal Processor Controller20663OSn in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0384]—This Paragraph [0384] illustrates another embodiment ofSignal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1n (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1n (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a SignalProcessor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Signal Processor Controller Update Request is a request tosend Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n (Paragraph [0355])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version DataH63b1n from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1n from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n with SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1n stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1n of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New SignalProcessor Controller Sending Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Signal Processor ControllerH63OSn (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofSignal Processor Controller 20663OSn (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0385]—This Paragraph [0385] illustrates Solar PanelController Updating Software H63c1o (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663c1o(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update Solar PanelController 20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663b1o from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingSolar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b1o (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663b1o (Paragraph [0349]) with Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63b1o stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b1o of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Solar Panel Controller H63OSo from HostH (S5), CPU 211 stores Solar Panel Controller H63OSo as Solar PanelController 20663OSo in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0386]—This Paragraph [0386] illustrates another embodiment ofSolar Panel Controller Updating Software H63c1o (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Solar Panel Controller Updating Software20663c1o (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Solar Panel ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Solar PanelController Update Request is a request to send Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63b1o (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves Solar PanelController Version Data H63b1o from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o withSolar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b1o stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663b1o of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Solar Panel Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Solar Panel Controller SendingRequest is a request to send Solar Panel Controller H63OSo (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesSolar Panel Controller H63OSo (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Solar Panel Controller H63OSo from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesSolar Panel Controller H63OSo as Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0387]—This Paragraph [0387] illustrates Speaker ControllerUpdating Software H63c1p (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Speaker Controller 20663OSpstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesSpeaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p (Paragraph [0349]) with SpeakerController Version Data H63b1p stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects inS3 that Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Speaker Controller H63OSp,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Speaker Controller H63OSp from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Speaker Controller H63OSp as Speaker Controller 20663OSp inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version ofSpeaker Controller 20663OSp (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0388]—This Paragraph [0388] illustrates another embodiment ofSpeaker Controller Updating Software H63c1p (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update SpeakerController 20663OSp stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Speaker Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Speaker ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send Speaker Controller Version DataH63b1p (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves Speaker Controller VersionData H63b1p from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingSpeaker Controller Version Data H63b1p from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p with Speaker ControllerVersion Data 20663b1p stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewSpeaker Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Speaker Controller Sending Request is a request to sendSpeaker Controller H63OSp (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Speaker Controller H63OSp(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Speaker ControllerH63OSp from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Speaker Controller H63OSp asSpeaker Controller 20663OSp in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Speaker Controller 20663OSp (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0389]—This Paragraph [0389] illustrates Vibrator ControllerUpdating Software H63c1q (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Vibrator Controller 20663OSqstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesVibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q (Paragraph [0349]) withVibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves VibratorController H63OSq, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Vibrator Controller H63OSqfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Vibrator Controller H63OSq as VibratorController 20663OSq in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0390]—This Paragraph [0390] illustrates another embodiment ofVibrator Controller Updating Software H63c1q (Paragraph [0356]) of HostH (Paragraph [0025]) and Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update VibratorController 20663OSq stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Vibrator Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Vibrator ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send Vibrator Controller Version DataH63b1q (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves Vibrator Controller VersionData H63b1q from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingVibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q with VibratorController Version Data 20663b1q stored in OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assumingthat CPU211 detects in S4 that Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1qof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewVibrator Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Vibrator Controller Sending Request is a request to sendVibrator Controller H63OSq (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Vibrator Controller H63OSq(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Vibrator ControllerH63OSq from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Vibrator Controller H63OSq asVibrator Controller 20663OSq in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0391]—This Paragraph [0391] illustrates Video ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1r (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Video Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1r (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateVideo Processor Controller 20663OSr stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Video ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1r from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares VideoProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1r (Paragraph [0349]) with VideoProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1r stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr as Video Processor Controller 20663OSr inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version ofVideo Processor Controller 20663OSr (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0392]—This Paragraph [0392] illustrates another embodiment ofVideo Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1r (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Video Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1r (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Video Processor Controller 20663OSr stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a VideoProcessor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Video Processor Controller Update Request is a request to sendVideo Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r (Paragraph [0355]) storedin Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, HostH retrieves Video Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r from OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the datato Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Video ProcessorController Version Data H63b1r from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares VideoProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1r with Video Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663b1r stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Video Processor Controller Version Data20663b1r of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New Video Processor Controller Sending Request, which is received byHost H (S5). Here, the New Video Processor Controller Sending Request isa request to send Video Processor Controller H63OSr (Paragraph [0352])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Video Processor Controller H63OSr from Host H (S7), CPU 211stores Video Processor Controller H63OSr as Video Processor Controller20663OSr in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The oldversion of Video Processor Controller 20663OSr (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0393]—This Paragraph [0393] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1s (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1s (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663b1s from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s (Paragraph [0349]) withWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming thatHost H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data20663b1s of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs as Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSs in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0394]—This Paragraph [0394] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1s (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1s (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#1, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#1 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1s from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph[0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1swith Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver ControllerSending Request#1, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewWireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#1 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller H63OSs (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSs (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0395]—This Paragraph [0395] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1t (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1t (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663b1t from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t (Paragraph [0349]) withWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming thatHost H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data20663b1t of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt as Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSt in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0396]—This Paragraph [0396] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1t (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1t (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#2, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#2 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1t from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph[0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1twith Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver ControllerSending Request#2, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewWireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#2 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller H63OSt (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSt (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0397]—This Paragraph [0397] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1u (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1u (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663b1u from OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u (Paragraph [0349]) withWireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming thatHost H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data20663b1u of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu as Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSu in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0398]—This Paragraph [0398] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1u (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1u (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#3, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#3 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1u from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph[0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1uwith Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver ControllerSending Request#3, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewWireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#3 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller H63OSu (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSu (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0399]—This Paragraph [0399] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1v (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1v (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1v (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v(Paragraph [0349]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63b1v stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSv, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSvfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSvas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSv (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0400]—This Paragraph [0400] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1v (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1v (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#1, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#1is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1v from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1v with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1vstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New WirelessTransmitter Controller Sending Request#1, which is received by Host H(S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#1 isa request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv (Paragraph [0352]), which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv as WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSv in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSv (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0401]—This Paragraph [0401] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1w (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1w (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1w (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w(Paragraph [0349]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63b1w stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSw, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSwfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSwas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSw (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0402]—This Paragraph [0402] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1w (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1w (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#2, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#2is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1w from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1w with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1wstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New WirelessTransmitter Controller Sending Request#2, which is received by Host H(S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#2 isa request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw (Paragraph [0352]), which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw as WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSw in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSw (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0403]—This Paragraph [0403] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1x (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1x (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1x (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x(Paragraph [0349]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63b1x stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0355])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSx, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSxfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSxas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSx (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0404]—This Paragraph [0404] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1x (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1x (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#3, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#3is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1x from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1x with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1xstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New WirelessTransmitter Controller Sending Request#3, which is received by Host H(S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#3 isa request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx (Paragraph[0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx (Paragraph [0352]), which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx as WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSx in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSx (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0405]—As another embodiment, each and all data and softwareprograms described in this specification stored in Communication Device200 may be updated in the manner described hereinbefore.

Paragraph [0406]—For the avoidance of doubt, the present function may beutilized to repair the operating system of Communication Device 200,i.e., Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345] and Paragraph [0345])in the form of downloading updates.

Paragraph [0407]—<<OCR Function>>

Paragraph [0408]—This Paragraph [0408] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes OCRInformation Storage Area 20666a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0410].

Paragraph [0409]—The data and/or the software programs stored in OCRInformation Storage Area 20666a (Paragraph [0408]) may be downloadedfrom Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0410]—This Paragraph [0410] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OCR Information Storage Area 20666a (Paragraph [0408]). Inthis embodiment, OCR Information Storage Area 20666a includes OCR DataStorage Area 20666b and OCR Software Storage Area 20666c. OCR DataStorage Area 20666b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0411] throughParagraph [0416]. OCR Software Storage Area 20666c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0417].

Paragraph [0411]—This Paragraph [0411] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OCR Data Storage Area 20666b (Paragraph [0410]). In thisembodiment, OCR Data Storage Area 20666b includes Web Address DataStorage Area 20666b1, Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2, PhoneData Storage Area 20666b3, Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4, ImageData Storage Area 20666b5, and Work Area 20666b6. Web Address DataStorage Area 20666b1 stores the data described in Paragraph [0412].Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2 stores the data described inParagraph [0413]. Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0414]. Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4stores the data described in Paragraph [0415]. Image Data Storage Area20666b5 stores the data described in Paragraph [0416]. Work Area 20666b6is utilized as a work area to perform calculation and temporarily storedata.

Paragraph [0412]—This Paragraph [0412] illustrates the data stored inWeb Address Data Storage Area 20666b1 (Paragraph [0411]). In thisembodiment, Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Web Address ID’ and ‘Web Address Data’. Column ‘Web Address ID’stores the web address IDs, and each web address ID is the title of thecorresponding web address data stored in column ‘Web Address Data’utilized for identification purposes. Column ‘Web Address Data’ storesthe web address data, and each web address data represents a web addresscomposed of alphanumeric data of which the first portion thereof is‘http://’. In this embodiment, Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1stores the following data: the web address ID ‘Web Address#1’ and thecorresponding web address data ‘Web Address Data#1’; the web address ID‘Web Address#2’ and the corresponding web address data ‘Web AddressData#2’; the web address ID ‘Web Address#3’ and the corresponding webaddress data ‘Web Address Data#3’; and the web address ID ‘WebAddress#4’ and the corresponding web address data ‘Web Address Data#4’.

Paragraph [0413]—This Paragraph [0413] illustrates the data stored inEmail Address Data Storage Area 20666b2 (Paragraph [0411]). In thisembodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Email Address ID’ and ‘Email Address Data’. Column‘Email Address ID’ stores the email address IDs, and each email addressID is the title of the corresponding email address data stored in column‘Email Address Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column ‘EmailAddress Data’ stores the email address data, and each email address datarepresents an email address composed of alphanumeric data which includes‘@’ mark therein. In this embodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area20666b2 stores the following data: the email address ID ‘EmailAddress#1’ and the corresponding email address data ‘Email AddressData#1’; the email address ID ‘Email Address#2’ and the correspondingemail address data ‘Email Address Data#2’; the email address ID ‘EmailAddress#3’ and the corresponding email address data ‘Email AddressData#3’; and the email address ID ‘Email Address#4’ and thecorresponding email address data ‘Email Address Data#4’.

Paragraph [0414]—This Paragraph [0414] illustrates the data stored inPhone Data Storage Area 20666b3 (Paragraph [0411]). In this embodiment,Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Phone ID’and ‘Phone Data’. Column ‘Phone ID’ stores the phone IDs, and each phoneID is the title of the corresponding phone data stored in column ‘PhoneData’ utilized for identification purposes. Column ‘Phone Data’ storesthe phone data, and each phone data represents a phone number composedof numeric figure of which the format is ‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’. In thisembodiment, Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3 stores the following data:the phone ID ‘Phone#1’ and the corresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#1’;the phone ID ‘Phone#2’ and the corresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#2’;the phone ID ‘Phone#3’ and the corresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#3’;and the phone ID ‘Phone#4’ and the corresponding phone data ‘PhoneData#4’.

Paragraph [0415]—This Paragraph [0415] illustrates the data stored inAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 (Paragraph [0411]). In thisembodiment, Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Alphanumeric ID’ and ‘Alphanumeric Data’. Column‘Alphanumeric ID’ stores alphanumeric IDs, and each alphanumeric ID isthe title of the corresponding alphanumeric data stored in column‘Alphanumeric Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column‘Alphanumeric Data’ stores the alphanumeric data, and each alphanumericdata represents alphanumeric figure primarily composed of numbers,texts, words, and letters. In this embodiment, Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20666b4 stores the following data: the alphanumeric ID‘Alphanumeric#1’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data ‘AlphanumericData#1’; the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#2’ and the correspondingalphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#2’; the alphanumeric ID‘Alphanumeric#3’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data ‘AlphanumericData#3’; and the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#4’ and the correspondingalphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#4’.

Paragraph [0416]—This Paragraph [0416] illustrates the data stored inImage Data Storage Area 20666b5 (Paragraph [0411]). In this embodiment,Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Image ID’and ‘Image Data’. Column ‘Image ID’ stores the image IDs, and each imageID is the title of the corresponding image data stored in column ‘ImageData’ utilized for identification purposes. Column ‘Image Data’ storesthe image data, and each image data is a data composed of image such asthe image input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, ImageData Storage Area 20666b5 stores the following data: the Image ID‘Image#1’ and the corresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#1’; the Image ID‘Image#2’ and the corresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#2’; the Image ID‘Image#3’ and the corresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#3’; and the ImageID ‘Image#4’ and the corresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#4’.

Paragraph [0417]—This Paragraph [0417] illustrates the software programsstored in OCR Software Storage Area 20666c (Paragraph [0410]). In thisembodiment, OCR Software Storage Area 20666c stores Image Data ScanningSoftware 20666c1, Image Data Storing Software 20666c2, OCR Software20666c3, Alphanumeric Data Storing Software 20666c4, Web Address DataIdentifying Software 20666c5a, Web Address Data Correcting Software20666c5b, Web Address Data Storing Software 20666c5c, Address AccessingSoftware 20666c5d, Email Address Data Identifying Software 20666c6a,Email Address Data Correcting Software 20666c6b, Email Address DataStoring Software 20666c6c, Email Editing Software 20666c6d, Phone DataIdentifying Software 20666c7a, Phone Data Correcting Software 20666c7b,Phone Data Storing Software 20666c7c, and Dialing Software 20666c7d.Image Data Scanning Software 20666c1 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0418]. Image Data Storing Software 20666c2 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0419]. OCR Software 20666c3 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0420]. Alphanumeric DataStoring Software 20666c4 is the software program described in Paragraph[0421]. Web Address Data Identifying Software 20666c5a is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0422]. Web Address Data CorrectingSoftware 20666c5b is the software program described in Paragraph [0423].Web Address Data Storing Software 20666c5c is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0424]. Web Address Accessing Software 20666c5dis the software program described in Paragraph [0425]. Email AddressData Identifying Software 20666c6a is the software program described inParagraph [0426]. Email Address Data Correcting Software 20666c6b is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0427]. Email Address DataStoring Software 20666c6c is the software program described in Paragraph[0428]. Email Editing Software 20666c6d is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0429]. Phone Data Identifying Software 20666c7ais the software program described in Paragraph [0430]. Phone DataCorrecting Software 20666c7b is the software program described inParagraph [0431]. Phone Data Storing Software 20666c7c is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0432]. Dialing Software 20666c7d is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0433].

Paragraph [0418]—This Paragraph [0418] illustrates Image Data ScanningSoftware 20666c1 (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which scans animage by utilizing CCD Unit (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) scans an image by utilizing CCD Unit (FIG. 1) (S1), and storesthe extracted image data in Work Area 20666b6 (Paragraph [0411]) (S2).CPU 211 then retrieves the image data from Work Area 20666b6 (Paragraph[0411]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

Paragraph [0419]—This Paragraph [0419] illustrates Image Data StoringSoftware 20666c2 (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which storesthe image data scanned by CCD Unit (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves the image data from Work Area 20666b6 (Paragraph[0411]) and displays the data On LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs an image ID, i.e., a title of the imagedata by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S2). CPU 211 then stores the image ID and the image data inImage Data Storage Area 20666b5 (Paragraph [0416]) (S3).

Paragraph [0420]—This Paragraph [0420] illustrates OCR Software 20666c3(not shown) of Communication Device 200, which extracts alphanumericdata from image data by utilizing the method so-called ‘opticalcharacter recognition’ or ‘OCR’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the image IDs from Image Data Storage Area 20666b5 (Paragraph[0416]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the image IDs by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 thenretrieves the image data of the image ID selected in S2 from Image DataStorage Area 20666b5 (Paragraph [0416]) and displays the image data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 executes the OCR process, i.e., extractsalphanumeric data from the image data (S4), and stores the extractedalphanumeric data in Work Area 20666b6 (Paragraph [0411]) (S5).

Paragraph [0421]—This Paragraph [0421] illustrates Alphanumeric DataStoring Software 20666c4 (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichstores the extracted alphanumeric data in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20666b4 (Paragraph [0415]). In this embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs an alphanumeric ID (i.e., the title ofthe alphanumeric data) (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves thealphanumeric data from Work Area 20666b6 (Paragraph [0411]) (S2), andstores the data in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 (Paragraph[0415]) with the Alphanumeric ID (S3).

Paragraph [0422]—This Paragraph [0422] illustrates Web Address DataIdentifying Software 20666c5a (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which identifies the web address data among the Alphanumeric Data. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumeric IDs fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displaysthe alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects one of the Alphanumeric IDs by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 retrieves thecorresponding alphanumeric data from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20666b4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area20666b6 (Paragraph [0411]) for the web address data identificationexplained in the next step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data,i.e., applies the web address criteria (for example, ‘http://’, ‘www.’,‘.com’, ‘.org’, ‘.edu’) to each alphanumeric data, and identifies theweb address data included therein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes theidentified web address data by changing the font color (for example,blue) and drawing underlines to the identified web address data (S6).CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data with the identified web addressdata emphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0423]—This Paragraph [0423] illustrates Web Address DataCorrecting Software 20666c5b (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which corrects the misidentified web address data by manually selectingthe start point and the end point of the web address data. For example,if the web address data is misidentified as ‘www.yahoo’ and leaves outthe remaining ‘.com’, the user of Communication Device 200 may manuallycorrect the web address data by selecting the start point and the endpoint of ‘www.yahoo.com’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysthe alphanumeric data with web address data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the start point of the web address data(S2) and the end point of the web address data by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 thenidentifies the alphanumeric data located between the start point and theend point as web address data (S4), and emphasizes the web address databy changing the font color (for example, blue) and drawing underlinesthereto (S5). The alphanumeric data with the web address data emphasizedare displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0424]—This Paragraph [0424] illustrates Web Address DataStoring Software 20666c5c (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichstores the web address data in Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b1(Paragraph [0412]). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays thealphanumeric data with web address data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the web address data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, andCPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, change to bold font) (S2). Theuser then inputs the web address ID (the title of the web address data)(S3). CPU 211 stores the web address ID and the web address data in WebAddress Data Storage Area 20666b1 (Paragraph [0412]) (S4).

Paragraph [0425]—This Paragraph [0425] illustrates Web Address AccessingSoftware 20666c5d (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichaccesses the web site represented by the web address data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with webaddress data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one of the web address data by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (for example, click one of theweb address data) (S2). CPU 211 then opens an internet browser (forexample, the Internet Explorer) and enters the web address data selectedin S2 therein (S3). CPU 211 accesses the web site thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0426]—This Paragraph [0426] illustrates Email Address DataIdentifying Software 20666c6a (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which identifies the email address data among the alphanumeric data. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumeric IDs fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displaysthe alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects one of the alphanumeric IDs by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 retrieves thecorresponding alphanumeric data from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20666b4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area20666b6 (Paragraph [0411]) for the email address data identificationexplained in the next step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data,i.e., applies the email address criteria (for example, ‘@’) to eachalphanumeric data, and identifies the email address data includedtherein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identified email address data bychanging the font color (for example, green) and drawing underlines tothe identified email address data (S6). CPU 211 displays thealphanumeric data with the identified email address data emphasized onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0427]—This Paragraph [0427] illustrates Email Address DataCorrecting Software 20666c6b (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which corrects the misidentified email address data by manuallyselecting the start point and the end point of the email address data.For example, if the email address data is misidentified as‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo’ and leaves out the remaining ‘com’, the user ofCommunication Device 200 may manually correct the email address data byselecting the start point and the end point of ‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo.com’.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withemail address data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects the start point of the email address data (S2) and the end pointof the email address data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the alphanumericdata located between the start point and the end point as email addressdata (S4), and emphasizes the email address data by changing the fontcolor (for example, green) and drawing underlines thereto (S5). Thealphanumeric data with the email address data emphasized are displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0428]—This Paragraph [0428] illustrates Email Address DataStoring Software 20666c6c (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichstores the email address data to Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2(Paragraph [0413]). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays thealphanumeric data with the email address data emphasized (S1). The userof Communication Device 200 selects one of the email address data, andCPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, change to bold font) (S2). Theuser then inputs the email address ID (the title of the email addressdata) by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3). CPU 211 stores the email address ID and the email addressdata in Email Address Data Storage Area 20666b2 (Paragraph [0413]) (S4).

Paragraph [0429]—This Paragraph [0429] illustrates Email EditingSoftware 20666c6d (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which opensan email editor (for example, the Outlook Express) wherein the emailaddress data is set as the receiver's address. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with the email address dataemphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theemail address data (for example, click one of the email address data) byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 then opens an email editor (for example, the OutlookExpress) (S3), and sets the email address data selected in S2 as thereceiver's address (S4).

Paragraph [0430]—This Paragraph [0430] illustrates Phone DataIdentifying Software 20666c7a (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which identifies the phone data among the alphanumeric data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumeric IDs fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displaysthe alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects one of the alphanumeric IDs (S2). CPU 211 retrievesthe corresponding alphanumeric data from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20666b4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area20666b6 (Paragraph [0411]) for the phone data identification explainedin the next step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data, i.e.,applies the phone criteria (for example, numeric data with‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’ format) to each alphanumeric data, and identifies thephone data included therein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identifiedphone data by changing the font color (for example, yellow) and drawingunderlines to the identified phone data (S6). CPU 211 displays thealphanumeric data with the identified phone data emphasized on LCD 201(FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0431]—This Paragraph [0431] illustrates Phone Data CorrectingSoftware 20666c7b (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichcorrects the misidentified phone data by manually selecting the startpoint and the end point of the phone data. For example, if the phonedata is misidentified as ‘916-455-’ and leaves out the remaining ‘1293’,the user of Communication Device 200 may manually correct the phone databy selecting the start point and the end point of ‘916-455-1293’. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withphone data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selectsthe start point of the phone data (S2) and the end point of the phonedata by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the alphanumeric data locatedbetween the start point and the end point as phone data (S4), andemphasizes the phone data by changing the font color (for example,yellow) and drawing underlines thereto (S5). The alphanumeric data withthe phone data emphasized are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter(S6).

Paragraph [0432]—This Paragraph [0432] illustrates Phone Data StoringSoftware 20666c7c (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which storesthe phone data to Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3 (Paragraph [0414]). Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withthe phone data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one of the phone data, and CPU 211 emphasizes the data (forexample, change to bold font) (S2). The user then inputs the phone ID(the title of the phone data) (S3). CPU 211 stores the phone ID and thephone data in Phone Data Storage Area 20666b3 (Paragraph [0414]) (S4).

Paragraph [0433]—This Paragraph [0433] illustrates Dialing Software20666c7d (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which opens a phonedialer and initiates a dialing process by utilizing the phone data. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withthe phone data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one of the phone data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (for example, click one of the phone data)(S2). CPU 211 then opens a phone dialer (S3), and inputs the phone dataselected in S2 (S4). A dialing process is initiated thereafter.

Paragraph [0434]—<<Multiple Mode Implementing Function>>

Paragraph [0435]—Paragraph [0436] through Paragraph [0440] illustratethe multiple mode implementing function of Communication Device 200which enables to activate and implement a plurality of modes, functions,and/or systems described in this specification simultaneously.

Paragraph [0436]—This Paragraph [0436] illustrates the software programsstored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the multiple mode implementingfunction (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Multiple ModeImplementer Storage Area 20690a. Multiple Mode Implementer Storage Area20690a stores Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b, Mode List DisplayingSoftware 20690c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, Mode ActivatingSoftware 20690e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690f, all of whichare software programs. Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b administers theoverall implementation of the present function. One of the major tasksof Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b is to administer and control thetiming and sequence of Mode List Displaying Software 20690c, ModeSelecting Software 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690e, and ModeImplementation Repeater 20690f. For example, Multiple Mode Implementer20690b executes them in the following order: Mode List DisplayingSoftware 20690c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, Mode ActivatingSoftware 20690e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690f. Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690c displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) a list of acertain amount or all modes, functions, and/or systems explained in thisspecification of which the sequence is explained in Paragraph [0438].Mode Selecting Software 20690d selects a certain amount or all modes,functions, and/or systems explained in this specification of which thesequence is explained in Paragraph [0438]. Mode Activating Software20690e activates a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/orsystems selected by the Mode Selecting Software 20690d of which thesequence is explained in Paragraph [0439]. Mode Implementation Repeater20690f executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b which reactivates ModeList Displaying Software 20690c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, ModeActivating Software 20690e of which the sequence is explained inParagraph [0440]. Paragraph [0437]—This Paragraph [0437] illustrates thesequence of Mode List Displaying Software 20690c (Paragraph [0436]). Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690c, displays a list of a certain amount or allmodes, functions, and/or systems described in this specification on LCD201 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0438]—This Paragraph [0438] illustrates the sequence of ModeSelecting Software 20690d (Paragraph [0436]). In this embodiment, theuser of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system identifyingone of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1), and CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode SelectingSoftware 20690d, interprets the input signal and selects thecorresponding mode, function, or system (S2).

Paragraph [0439]—This Paragraph [0439] illustrates the sequence of ModeActivating Software 20690e (Paragraph [0436]). In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode Activating Software 20690e,activates the mode, function, or, system selected in S2 of Paragraph[0438]. CPU 211 thereafter implements the activated mode, function, orsystem as described in the relevant paragraphs in this specification.

Paragraph [0440]—This Paragraph [0440] illustrates the sequence of ModeImplementation Repeater 20690f (Paragraph [0436]). In this embodiment,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Once theactivation of the selected mode, function, or system described inParagraph [0439] hereinbefore is completed, and if the input signalindicates to repeat the process to activate another mode, function, orsystem (S2), CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode ImplementationRepeater 20690f, executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b (Paragraph[0436]), which reactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690c(Paragraph [0436]), Mode Selecting Software 20690d (Paragraph [0436]),and Mode Activating Software 20690e (Paragraph [0436]) to activate thesecond mode, function, or system while the first mode, function, orsystem is implemented by utilizing the method of so-called ‘timesharing’ (S3). Mode List Displaying Software 20690c, Mode SelectingSoftware 20690d, and Mode Activating Software 20690e can be repeatedlyexecuted until all modes, function, and systems displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) are selected and activated. The activation of modes, functions,and/or systems is not repeated if the input signal explained in S2 soindicates.

Paragraph [0441]—<<Incorporation By Reference>>

Paragraph [0442]—The following paragraphs and drawings described in U.S.Ser. No. 10/710,600, filed 2004Jul. 23, are incorporated to thisapplication by reference: the preamble described in paragraph [1806] (nodrawings); Communication Device 200 (Voice Communication Mode) describedin paragraphs [1807] through [1812] (FIGS. 1 through 2 c); VoiceRecognition System described in paragraphs [1813] through [1845] (FIGS.3 through 19); Positioning System described in paragraphs [1846] through[1877] (FIGS. 20 a through 32 e); Auto Backup System described inparagraphs [1878] through [1887] (FIGS. 33 through 37); Signal Amplifierdescribed in paragraphs [1888] through [1893] (FIG. 38); Audio/VideoData Capturing System described in paragraphs [1894] through [1906](FIGS. 39 through 44 b); Digital Mirror Function (1) described inparagraphs [1907] through [1915] (FIGS. 44 c through 44 e); Caller IDSystem described in paragraphs [1916] through [1923] (FIGS. 45 through47); Stock Purchasing Function described in paragraphs [1924] through[1933] (FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Function described inparagraphs [1934] through [1940] (FIGS. 53 a and 53 b); Call BlockingFunction described in paragraphs [1941] through [1954] (FIGS. 54 through59); Online Payment Function described in paragraphs [1955] through[1964] (FIGS. 60 through 64); Navigation System described in paragraphs[1965] through [1987] (FIGS. 65 through 74 a); Remote Controlling Systemdescribed in paragraphs [1988] through [2006] (FIGS. 75 through 85);Auto Emergency Calling System described in paragraphs [2007] through[2015] (FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TV Function described in paragraphs[2016] through [2100] (FIGS. 88 through 135); 3D Video Game Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2101] through [2113] (FIGS. 136 through 144);Digital Mirror Function (2) described in paragraphs [2114] through[2123] (FIGS. 145 through 155); Voice Recognition Sys—E-mail (2)described in paragraphs [2124] through [2132] (FIGS. 156 through 160);Positioning System—GPS Search Engine described in paragraphs [2133]through [2175] (FIGS. 161 through 182); Mobile Ignition Key Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2176] through [2198] (FIGS. 183 through 201);Voice Print Authentication System described in paragraphs [2199] through[2209] (FIGS. 202 through 211); Fingerprint Authentication Systemdescribed in paragraphs [2210] through [2222] (FIGS. 212 through 221);Auto Time Adjust Function described in paragraphs through [2227] (FIGS.222 through 224); Video/Photo Mode described in paragraphs [2228]through [2256] (FIGS. 225 through 242); Call Taxi Function described inparagraphs [2257] through [2297] (FIGS. 243 through 269); Shooting VideoGame Function described in paragraphs through [2314] (FIGS. 270 through283); Driving Video Game Function described in paragraphs [2315] through[2328] (FIGS. 284 through 294); Address Book Updating Function describedin paragraphs [2329] through [2349] (FIGS. 295 through 312); BatchAddress Book Updating Function—With Host described in paragraphs [2350]through [2371] (FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address Book UpdatingFunction—Peer-To-Peer Connection described in paragraphs through [2376](FIGS. 329 a through 329 c); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—With Hostdescribed in paragraphs [2377] through [2400] (FIGS. 330 through 350);Batch Scheduler Updating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection described inparagraphs [2401] through [2405] (FIGS. 351 and 352); CalculatorFunction described in paragraphs [2406] through [2411] (FIGS. 353through 356); Spreadsheet Function described in paragraphs [2412]through [2419] (FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2420] through [2435] (FIGS. 361 through 373);TV Remote Controller Function described in paragraphs [2436] through[2458] (FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PC Inter-communicating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2459] through [2483] (FIGS. 413 through 427);PDWR Sound Selecting Function described in paragraphs [2484] through[2520] (FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function described inparagraphs [2521] through [2537] (FIGS. 457 through 466); AnotherEmbodiment Of Communication Device 200 described in paragraphs [2538]through [2542] (FIGS. 467 a through 467 d); Stereo Audio Data OutputFunction described in paragraphs [2543] through [2562] (FIGS. 468through 479); Stereo Visual Data Output Function described in paragraphs[2563] through (FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple Signal ProcessingFunction described in paragraphs through [2655] (FIGS. 492 through 529);Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [2656]through [2689] (FIGS. 530 through 553); Artificial Satellite Hostdescribed in paragraphs [2690] through [2708] (FIGS. 554 through 567);CCD Bar Code Reader Function described in paragraphs [2709] through[2730] (FIGS. 568 through 579); Online Renting Function described inparagraphs [2731] through [2808] (FIGS. 580 through 633); SOS CallingFunction described in paragraphs [2809] through [2829] (FIGS. 634through 645); Input Device described in paragraphs [2830] through [2835](FIGS. 646 through 650); PC Remote Controlling Function described inparagraphs [2836] through [0105] (FIGS. 651 through 670); PC RemoteDownloading Function described in paragraphs [0106] through [2921](FIGS. 671 through 701); Audiovisual Playback Function described inparagraphs [2922] through [2947] (FIGS. 702 through 716); Audio PlaybackFunction described in paragraphs [2948] through [2972] (FIGS. 717through 731); Ticket Purchasing Function described in paragraphs [2973]through [3002] (FIGS. 732 through 753); Remote Data Erasing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3003] through [3032] (FIGS. 754 through 774);Business Card Function described in paragraphs [3033] through [3049](FIGS. 775 through 783); Game Vibrating Function described in paragraphs[3050] through [3060] (FIGS. 784 through 786); Part-time Job FindingFunction described in paragraphs [3061] through [3081] (FIGS. 787through 801); Parking Lot Finding Function described in paragraphs[3082] through (FIGS. 802 through 832); Parts Upgradable CommunicationDevice described in paragraphs through [3147] (FIGS. 833 a through 833x); On Demand TV Function described in paragraphs [3148] through [3178](FIGS. 834 through 855); Inter-communicating TV Function described inparagraphs [3179] through [3213] (FIGS. 856 through 882); DisplayControlling Function described in paragraphs [3214] through [3231](FIGS. 883 through 894); Multiple Party Communicating Function describedin paragraphs [3232] through [3265] (FIGS. 894 a through 917); DisplayBrightness Controlling Function described in paragraphs [3266] through[3275] (FIGS. 918 through 923); Multiple Party Pin-pointing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3276] through [3323] (FIGS. 924 through 950 f);Digital Camera Function described in paragraphs [3324] through [3351](FIGS. 951 through 968); Phone Number Linking Function described inparagraphs through [3375] (FIGS. 968 a through 983); Multiple WindowDisplaying Function described in paragraphs [3376] through [0159] (FIGS.984 through 995); Mouse Pointer Displaying Function described inparagraphs [0160] through [3432] (FIGS. 996 through 1021); House ItemPin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [3433] through [3592](FIGS. 1022 through 1152); Membership Administrating Function describedin paragraphs [3593] through [3635] (FIGS. 1153 through 1188); KeywordSearch Timer Recording Function described in paragraphs [3636] through[0193] (FIGS. 1189 through 1254); Weather Forecast Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [0194] through [3769] (FIGS. 1255 through 1288);Multiple Language Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3770]through [3827] (FIGS. 1289 through 1331); Caller's InformationDisplaying Function described in paragraphs [3828] through [3880] (FIGS.1332 through 1375); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (ByPhone) described in paragraphs [3881] through [3921] (FIGS. 1394 through1415); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Web)described in paragraphs [3922] through [3962] (FIGS. 1416 through 1437);Shortcut Icon Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3963] through[3990] (FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task Tray Icon Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3991] through [4013] (FIGS. 1456 through 1470);Multiple Channel Processing Function described in paragraphs [4014]through [4061] (FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar Battery ChargingFunction described in paragraphs [4062] through [4075] (FIGS. 1499through 1509); OS Updating Function described in paragraphs [4076]through [0262] (FIGS. 1510 through 1575); Device Managing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [0263] through [4161] (FIGS. 1576 through 1587);Automobile Controlling Function described in paragraphs [4162] through[0304] (FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Function described in paragraphs[0305] through [4246] (FIGS. 1628 through 1652); Multiple ModeImplementing Function described in paragraphs [4248] through [4255](FIGS. 395 through 400); Multiple Software Download Function describedin paragraphs [4256] through (FIGS. 401 through 407); Selected SoftwareDistributing Function described in paragraphs through [4285] (FIGS. 1376through 1393 d); Multiple Software Download And Mode ImplementationFunction described in paragraphs [4286] through [4293] (FIGS. 408through 412); and the last sentence described in paragraph [4295] (nodrawings).

The paragraphs and drawings described in U.S. Serial No. 10/710,600filed Jul. 23, 2004 incorporated to this application by reference are,based on U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402: the preamble (col 57 line 64-col 58line 15; no drawings); Communication Device 200 (Voice CommunicationMode) (col 58 line 16-col 60 line 2; FIGS. 1 through 2 c); VoiceRecognition System (col 60 line 3-col 65 line 3; FIGS. 3 through 19);Positioning System (col 65 line 4-col 69 line 46; FIGS. 20 a through 32g); Auto Backup System (col 69 line 47-col 70 line 51; FIGS. 33 through37); Signal Amplifier (col 70 line 52-col 71 line 13; FIG. 38);Audio/Video Data Capturing System (col 71 line 14-col 72 line 67; FIGS.39 through 44 b); Digital Mirror Function (1) (col 73 line 1-col 74 line45; FIGS. 44 c through 44 e); Caller ID System (col 74 line 46-col 75line 18; FIGS. 45 through 47); Stock Purchasing Function (col 75 line19-col 76 line 23; FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Function (col 76line 24-col 76 line 67; FIGS. 53 a and 53 b); Call Blocking Function(col 77 line 1-col 78 line 35; FIGS. 54 through 59); Online PaymentFunction (col 78 line 36-col 79 line 67; FIGS. 60 through 64);Navigation System (col 80 line 1-col 84 line 3; FIGS. 65 through 74 a);Remote Controlling System (col 84 line 4-col 87 line 10; FIGS. 75through 85); Auto Emergency Calling System (col 87 line 11-col 87 line62; FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TV Function (col 87 line 63-col 101 line54; FIGS. 88 through 135); 3D Video Game Function (col 101 line 55-col104 line 18; FIGS. 136 through 144); Digital Mirror Function (2) (col104 line 19-col 106 line 6; FIGS. 145 through 155); Voice RecognitionSys—E-mail (2) (col 106 line 7-col 107 line 38; FIGS. 156 through 160);Positioning System—GPS Search Engine (col 107 line 39-col 117 line 12;FIGS. 161 through 182); Mobile Ignition Key Function (col 117 line13-col 121 line 35; FIGS. 183 through 201); Voice Print AuthenticationSystem (col 121 line 36-col 123 line 44; FIGS. 202 through 211);Fingerprint Authentication System (col 123 line 45-col 126 line 7; FIGS.212 through 221); Auto Time Adjust Function (col 126 line 8-col 126 line48; FIGS. 222 through 224); Video/Photo Mode (col 126 line 49-col 131line 63; FIGS. 225 through 242); Call Taxi Function (col 131 line 64-col140 line 52; FIGS. 243 through 269); Shooting Video Game Function (col140 line 53-col 143 line 42; FIGS. 270 through 283); Driving Video GameFunction (col 143 line 43-col 146 line 7; FIGS. 284 through 294);Address Book Updating Function (col 146 line 8-col 149 line 13; FIGS.295 through 312); Batch Address Book Updating Function—With Host (col149 line 14-col 152 line 4; FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address BookUpdating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 152 line 5-col 152 line49; FIGS. 329 a through 329 c); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—WithHost (col 152 line 50-col 156 line 16; FIGS. 330 through 350); BatchScheduler Updating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 156 line 17—col156 line 67; FIGS. 351 and 352); Calculator Function (col 157 line 1-col157 line 59; FIGS. 353 through 356); Spreadsheet Function (col 157 line60-col 159 line 9; FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Function (col159 line 10-col 162 line 61; FIGS. 361 through 373); TV RemoteController Function (col 162 line 62-col 167 line 19;

FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PC Inter-communicating Function (col 167 line20-col 171 line 49; FIGS. 413 through 427); PDWR Sound SelectingFunction (col 171 line 50-col 179 line 3; FIGS. 428 through 456); StartUp Software Function (col 179 line 4-col 180 line 67; FIGS. 457 through466); Another Embodiment Of Communication Device 200 (col 181 line 1-col183 line 13; FIGS. 467 a through 467 d); Stereo Audio Data OutputFunction (col 183 line 14-col 185 line 67; FIGS. 468 through 479);Stereo Visual Data Output Function (col 186 line 1-col 188 line 51;FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple Signal Processing Function (col 188line 52-col 199 line 13; FIGS. 492 through 529); PositioningSystem—Pin-pointing Function (col 199 line 14—col 204 line 67; FIGS. 530through 553); Artificial Satellite Host (col 205 line 1-col 208 line 22;FIGS. 554 through 567); CCD Bar Code Reader Function (col 208 line23-col 211 line 27; FIGS. 568 through 579); Online Renting Function (col211 line 28-col 225 line 57; FIGS. 580 through 633); SOS CallingFunction (col 225 line 58-col 228 line 31; FIGS. 634 through 645); InputDevice (col 228 line 32-col 229 line 50; FIGS. 646 through 650); PCRemote Controlling Function (col 229 line 51-col 235 line 27; FIGS. 651through 670); PC Remote Downloading Function (col 235 line 28-col 244line 15; FIGS. 671 through 701); Audiovisual Playback Function (col 244line 16-col 249 line 15; FIGS. 702 through 716); Audio Playback Function(col 249 line 16-col 253 line 58; FIGS. 717 through 731); TicketPurchasing Function (col 253 line 59-col 259 line 5; FIGS. 732 through753); Remote Data Erasing Function (col 259 line 6-col 263 line 43;FIGS. 754 through 774); Business Card Function (col 263 line 44-col 266line 6; FIGS. 775 through 783); Game Vibrating Function (col 266 line7-col 267 line 17; FIGS. 784 through 786); Part-time Job FindingFunction (col 267 line 18-col 270 line 57; FIGS. 787 through 801);Parking Lot Finding Function (col 270 line 58-col 277 line 47; FIGS. 802through 832); Parts Upgradable Communication Device (col 277 line 48-col280 line 67; FIGS. 833 a through 833 x); On Demand TV Function (col 281line 1-col 287 line 3; FIGS. 834 through 855); Inter-communicating TVFunction (col 287 line 4-col 292 line 6; FIGS. 856 through 882);

Display Controlling Function (col 292 line 7-col 295 line 4; FIGS. 883through 894); Multiple Party Communicating Function (col 295 line 5-col301 line 34; FIGS. 894 a through 917); Display Brightness ControllingFunction (col 301 line 35-col 302 line 50; FIGS. 918 through 923);Multiple Party Pin-pointing Function (col 302 line 51-col 311 line 12;FIGS. 924 through 950 f); Digital Camera Function (col 311 line 13-col316 line 15; FIGS. 951 through 968); Phone Number Linking Function (col316 line 16-col 320 line 5; FIGS. 968 a through 983); Multiple WindowDisplaying Function (col 320 line 6-col 323 line 32; FIGS. 984 through995); Mouse Pointer Displaying Function (col 323 line 33-col 328 line64; FIGS. 996 through 1021); House Item Pin-pointing Function (col 328line 65-col 356 line 64; FIGS. 1022 through 1152); MembershipAdministrating Function (col 356 line 65-col 363 line 67; FIGS. 1153through 1188); Keyword Search Timer Recording Function (col 364 line1-col 385 line 55; FIGS. 1189 through 1254); Weather Forecast DisplayingFunction (col 385 line 56-col 394 line 56; FIGS. 1255 through 1288);Multiple Language Displaying Function (col 394 line 57-col 411 line 63;FIGS. 1289 through 1331); Caller's Information Displaying Function (col411 line 64-col 423 line 52; FIGS. 1332 through 1375); CommunicationDevice Remote Controlling Function (By Phone) (col 423 line 53-col 430line 46; FIGS. 1394 through 1415); Communication Device RemoteControlling Function (By Web) (col 430 line 47-col 437 line 61; FIGS.1416 through 1437); Shortcut Icon Displaying Function (col 437 line62-col 442 line 29; FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task Tray Icon DisplayingFunction (col 442 line 30-col 445 line 62; FIGS. 1456 through 1470);Multiple Channel Processing Function (col 445 line 63-col 455 line 27;FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar Battery Charging Function (col 455 line28-col 458 line 26; FIGS. 1499 through 1509); OS Updating Function (col458 line 27-col 489 line 3; FIGS. 1510 through 1575); Device ManagingFunction (col 489 line 4-col 492 line 59; FIGS. 1576 through 1587);Automobile Controlling Function (col 492 line 60-col 505 line 55; FIGS.1588 through 1627); OCR Function (col 505 line 56-col 512 line 51; FIGS.1628 through 1652); Multiple Mode Implementing Function (col 512 line52-col 515 line 56; FIGS. 395 through 400); Multiple Software DownloadFunction (col 515 line 57-col 518 line 3; FIGS. 401 through 407);Selected Software Distributing Function (col 518 line 4-col 523 line 54;FIGS. 1376 through 1393 d); Multiple Software Download And ModeImplementation Function (col 523 line 55-col 525 line 33; FIGS. 408through 412); and the last sentence (col 525 line 34-col 525 line 51; nodrawings). If there is ever discrepancy between the disclosures of thisapplication and U.S. Patent No. 8,090,402, the latter prevails.

Paragraph [0443]—<<Overall Functions>>

Paragraph [0444]—Communication Device 200 is capable to implement thefollowing functions, modes, and systems: a voice communication functionwhich transfers a 1st voice data input from the microphone via thewireless communication system and outputs a 2nd voice data received viathe wireless communication system from the speaker; a voice recognitionsystem which retrieves alphanumeric information from the user's voiceinput via the microphone; a voice recognition system which retrievesalphanumeric information from the user's voice input via the microphone,and a voice recognition refraining system which refrains fromimplementing the voice recognition system while a voice communication isimplemented by the communication device; a tag function and a phonenumber data storage area, the phone number data storage area includes aplurality of phone numbers, a voice tag is linked to each of theplurality of phone number, when a voice tag is detected in the voicedata retrieved via the microphone, the corresponding phone number isretrieved from the phone number data storage area; a voice recognitionnoise filtering mode, wherein a background noise is identified, afiltered voice data is produced by removing the background noise fromthe voice data input via the microphone, and the communication device isoperated by the filtered voice data; a sound/beep auto off functionwherein the communication device refrains from outputting a sound datastored in a sound data storage area while a voice recognition system isimplemented; a voice recognition system auto off implementor, whereinthe voice recognition system auto off implementor identifies the lapsedtime since a voice recognition system is activated and deactivates thevoice recognition system after a certain period of time has lapsed; avoice recognition email function which produces a voice produced emailwhich is an email produced by alphanumeric information retrieved fromthe user's voice input via the microphone, and the voice produced emailis stored in the data storage area; a voice communication textconverting function, wherein a 1st voice data which indicates the voicedata of the caller and a 2nd voice data which indicates the voice dataof the callee are retrieved, and the 1st voice data and the 2nd voicedata are converted to a 1st text data and a 2nd text data respectively,which are displayed on the display; a target device location indicatingfunction, wherein a target device location data identifying request istransferred to a host computing system in a wireless fashion, a map dataand a target device location data is received from the host computingsystem in a wireless fashion, and the map data with the locationcorresponding to the target device location data indicated thereon isdisplayed on the display; an auto backup function, wherein the dataidentified by the user is automatically retrieved from a data storagearea and transferred to another computing system in a wireless fashionperiodically for purposes of storing a backup data therein; anaudio/video data capturing system which stores an audiovisual dataretrieved via the microphone and a camera installed in the communicationdevice in the data storage area, retrieves the audiovisual data from thedata storage area, and sends the audiovisual data to another device in awireless fashion; a digital mirror function which displays an invertedvisual data of the visual data input via a camera of the communicationdevice on the display; a caller ID function which retrieves apredetermined color data and/or sound data which is specific to thecaller of the incoming call received by the communication device fromthe data storage area and outputs the predetermined color data and/orsound data from the communication device; a stock purchase functionwhich outputs a notice signal from the communication device when thecommunication device receives a notice data wherein the notice data isproduced by a computing system and sent to the communication device whena stock price of a predetermined stock brand meets a predeterminedcriteria; a timer email function which sends an email data stored in thedata storage area to a predetermined email address at the time indicatedby an email data sending time data stored in the data storage area; acall blocking function which blocks the incoming call if theidentification thereof is included in a call blocking list; an onlinepayment function which sends a payment data indicating a certain amountof currency to a certain computing system in a wireless fashion in orderfor the certain computing system to deduct the amount indicated by thepayment data from a certain account stored in the certain computingsystem; a navigation system which produces a map indicating the shortestroute from a first location to a second location by referring to anattribution data; a remote controlling system which sends a 1st remotecontrol signal in a wireless fashion by which a 1st device is controlledvia a network, a 2nd remote control signal in a wireless fashion bywhich a 2nd device is controlled via a network, and a 3rd remote controlsignal in a wireless fashion by which a 3rd device is controlled via anetwork; an auto emergency calling system wherein the communicationdevice transfers an emergency signal to a certain computing system whenan impact of a certain level is detected in a predetermined automobile;a cellular TV function which receives a TV data, which is a series ofdigital data indicating a TV program, via the wireless communicationsystem in a wireless fashion and outputs the TV data from thecommunication device; a 3D video game function which retrieves a 3Dvideo game object, which is controllable by a video game objectcontrolling command input via the input device, from the data storagearea and display the 3D video game object on the display; a GPS searchengine function, wherein a specific criteria is selected by the inputdevice and one or more of geographic locations corresponding to thespecific criteria are indicated on the display; a mobile ignition keyfunction which sends a mobile ignition key signal via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion in order to ignite an engineof an automobile; a voice print authentication system which implementsauthentication process by utilizing voice data of the user of thecommunication device; a fingerprint authentication system whichimplements authentication process by utilizing fingerprint data of theuser of the communication device; an auto time adjusting function whichautomatically adjusts the clock of the communication device by referringto a wireless signal received by the wireless communication system; avideo/photo function which implements a video mode and a photo mode,wherein the video/photo function displays moving image data under thevideo mode and the video/photo function displays still image data underthe photo mode on the display; a taxi calling function, wherein a 1stlocation which indicates the geographic location of the communicationdevice is identified, a 2nd location which indicates the geographiclocation of the taxi closest to the 1st location is identified, and the1st location and the 2nd location are indicated on the display; a 3Dshooting video game function, wherein the input device utilized forpurposes of implementing a voice communication mode is configured as aninput means for performing a 3D shooting video game, a user controlled3D game object which is the three-dimensional game object controlled bythe user and a CPU controlled 3D game object which is thethree-dimensional game object controlled by the CPU of the communicationdevice are displayed on the display, the CPU controlled 3D game objectis programmed to attack the user controlled 3D game object, and a userfired bullet object which indicates a bullet fired by the usercontrolled 3D game object is displayed on the display when a bulletfiring command is input via the input device; a 3D driving video gamefunction, wherein the input device utilized for purposes of implementinga voice communication mode is configured as an input means forperforming a 3D driving video game, a user controlled 3D automobilewhich is the three-dimensional game object indicating an automobilecontrolled by the user and a CPU controlled 3D automobile which is thethree-dimensional game object indicating another automobile controlledby the CPU of the communication device are displayed on the display, theCPU controlled 3D automobile is programmed to compete with the usercontrolled 3D automobile, and the user controlled 3D automobile iscontrolled by a user controlled 3D automobile controlling command inputvia the input device; an address book updating function which updatesthe address book stored in the communication device by personal computervia network; a batch address book updating function which updates alladdress books of a plurality of devices including the communicationdevice in one action; a batch scheduler updating function which updatesall schedulers of a plurality of devices including the communicationdevice in one action; a calculating function which implementsmathematical calculation by utilizing digits input via the input device;a spreadsheet function which displays a spreadsheet on the display,wherein the spreadsheet includes a plurality of cells which are alignedin a matrix fashion; a word processing function which implements a boldformatting function, an italic formatting function, and/or a fontformatting function, wherein the bold formatting function changesalphanumeric data to bold, the italic formatting function changesalphanumeric data to italic, and the font formatting function changesalphanumeric data to a selected font; a TV remote controlling functionwherein a TV control signal is transferred via the wirelesscommunication system, the TV control signal is a wireless signal tocontrol a TV tuner; a CD/PC inter-communicating function which retrievesthe data stored in a data storage area and transfers the data directlyto another computer by utilizing infra-red signal in a wireless fashion;a pre-dialing/dialing/waiting sound selecting function, wherein aselected pre-dialing sound which is one of the plurality of pre-dialingsound is registered, a selected dialing sound which is one of theplurality of dialing sound is registered, and a selected waiting soundwhich is one of the plurality of waiting sound is registered by the userof the communication device, and during the process of implementing avoice communication mode, the selected pre-dialing sound is output fromthe speaker before a dialing process is initiated, the selected dialingsound is output from the speaker during the dialing process isinitiated, and the selected waiting sound is output from the speakerafter the dialing process is completed; a startup software function,wherein a startup software identification data storage area stores astartup software identification data which is an identification of acertain software program selected by the user, when the power of thecommunication device is turned on, the startup software functionretrieves the startup software identification data from the startupsoftware identification data storage area and activates the certainsoftware program; the display includes a 1st display and a 2nd displaywhich display visual data in a stereo fashion, the microphone includes a1st microphone and a 2nd microphone which input audio data in a stereofashion, and the communication device further comprises a vibrator whichvibrates the communication device, an infra-red transmitting devicewhich transmits infra-red signals, a flash light unit which emits strobelight, a removable memory which stores a plurality of digital data andremovable from the communication device, and a photometer which a sensorto detect light intensity; a stereo audio data output function whichenables the communication device to output audio data in a stereofashion; a stereo visual data output function, wherein a left visualdata storage area stores a left visual data, a right visual data storagearea stores a right visual data, stereo visual data output functionretrieves the left visual data from the left visual data storage areaand displays on a left display and retrieves the right visual data fromthe right visual data storage area and displays on a right display; amultiple signal processing function, wherein the communicationimplements wireless communication under a 1st mode and a 2nd mode, thewireless communication is implemented by utilizing cdma2000 signal underthe 1st mode, and the wireless communication is implemented by utilizingW-CDMA signal under the 2nd mode; a pin-pointing function, wherein aplurality of in-door access points are installed in an artificialstructure, a target device location data which indicates the currentgeographic location of another device is identified by the geographicalrelation between the plurality of in-door access points and the anotherdevice, and the target device location data is indicated on the display;a CCD bar code reader function, wherein a bar code data storage areastores a plurality of bar code data, each of the plurality of bar codedata corresponds to a specific alphanumeric data, the CCD bar codereader function identifies the bar code data corresponding to a bar coderetrieved via a camera and identifies and displays the alphanumeric datacorresponding to the identified bar code data; an online rentingfunction which enables the user of communication device to download fromanother computing system and rent digital information for a certainperiod of time; an SOS calling function, wherein when a specific call ismade from the communication device, the SOS calling function retrieves acurrent geographic location data from a current geographic location datastorage area and retrieves a personal information data from a personalinformation data storage area and transfers the current geographiclocation data and the personal information data to a specific device ina wireless fashion; a PC remote controlling function, wherein an imagedata is produced by a personal computer, the image data is displayed onthe personal computer, the image data is transferred to thecommunication device, the image data is received via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion and stored in a data storagearea, the image data is retrieved from the data storage area anddisplayed on the display, a remote control signal input via the inputdevice is transferred to the personal computer via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion, and the personal computer iscontrolled in accordance with the remote control signal; a PC remotedownloading function, wherein the communication device sends a datatransferring instruction signal to a 1st computer via the wirelesscommunication system in a wireless fashion, wherein the datatransferring instruction signal indicates an instruction to the 1stcomputer to transfer a specific data stored therein to a 2nd computer;an audiovisual playback function, wherein an audiovisual data storagearea stores a plurality of audiovisual data, an audiovisual data isselected from the audiovisual data storage area, the audiovisualplayback function replays the audiovisual data if a replaying command isinput via the input device, the audiovisual playback function pauses toreplay the audiovisual data if a replay pausing command is input via theinput device, the audiovisual playback function resumes to replay theaudiovisual data if a replay resuming command is input via the inputdevice, the audiovisual playback function terminates to replay theaudiovisual data if a replay terminating command is input via the inputdevice, the audiovisual playback function fast-forwards to replay theaudiovisual data if a replay fast-forwarding command is input via theinput device, and the audiovisual playback function fast-rewinds toreplay the audiovisual data if a replay fast-rewinding command is inputvia the input device; an audio playback function which enables thecommunication device to playback audio data selected by the user of thecommunication device; a ticket purchasing function which enables thecommunication device to purchase tickets in a wireless fashion; a remotedata erasing function, wherein a data storage area stores a plurality ofdata, the remote data erasing function deletes a portion or all datastored in the data storage area in accordance with a data erasingcommand received from another computer via the wireless communicationsystem in a wireless fashion, the data erasing command identifies thedata to be erased selected by the user; a business card function whichretrieves a 1st business card data indicating the name, title, phonenumber, email address, and office address of the user of thecommunication device from the data storage area and sends via thewireless communication system in a wireless fashion and receives a 2ndbusiness card data indicating the name, title, phone number, emailaddress, and office address of the user of another device via thewireless communication system in a wireless fashion and stores the 2ndbusiness card data in the data storage area; a game vibrating functionwhich activates a vibrator of the communication device when a 1st gameobject contacts a 2nd game object displayed on the display; a part-timerfinding function which enables the user of the communication device tofind a part-time job in a specified manner by utilizing thecommunication device; a parking lot finding function which enables thecommunication device to display the closest parking lot with vacantspaces on the display with the best route thereto; an on demand TVfunction which enables the communication device to display TV program onthe display in accordance with the user's demand; an inter-communicatingTV function which enables the communication device to send answer datato host computing system at which the answer data from a plurality ofcommunication devices including the communication device are counted andthe counting data is produced; a display controlling function whichenables the communication device to control the brightness and/or thecontrast of the display per file opened or software program executed; amultiple party communicating function which enables the user of thecommunication device to voice communicate with more than one person viathe communication device; a display brightness controlling functionwhich controls the brightness of the display in accordance with thebrightness detected by a photometer of the surrounding area of the userof the communication device; a multiple party pin-pointing functionwhich enables the communication device to display the current locationsof a plurality of devices in artificial structure; a digital camerafunction, wherein a photo quality identifying command is input via theinput device, when a photo taking command is input via the input device,a photo data retrieved via a camera is stored in a photo data storagearea with the quality indicated by the photo quality identifyingcommand; a phone number linking function which displays a phone numberlink and dials a phone number indicated by the phone number link whenthe phone number link is selected; a multiple window displaying functionwhich displays a plurality of windows simultaneously on the display; amouse pointer displaying function which displays on the display a mousepointer which is capable to be manipulated by the user of thecommunication device; a house item pin-pointing function which enablesthe user of the communication device to find the location of the houseitems for which the user is looking in a house, wherein the house itemsare the tangible objects placed in a house which are movable by humanbeing; a membership administrating function in which host computingsystem allows only the users of the communication device who have paidthe monthly fee to access host computing system to implement a certainfunction; a keyword search timer recording function which enables totimer record TV programs which meet a certain criteria set by the userof the communication device; a weather forecast displaying functionwhich displays on the display the weather forecast of the currentlocation of the communication device; a multiple language displayingfunction, wherein a selected language is selected from a plurality oflanguages, and the selected language is utilized to operate thecommunication device; and a caller's information displaying functionwhich displays personal information regarding caller on the display whenthe communication device receives a phone call.

1. A communication device, which is a handheld device, comprising: amicrophone; a speaker; an input device; a display; an antenna; a voicecommunication implementer, wherein voice communication is implementedwith another device in a wireless fashion; a calculation implementer,wherein a mathematical calculation is implemented by utilizing a numericdata input via said input device; a bold formatting implementer, whereinthe user selected letter(s) is/are changed to bold; an italic formattingimplementer, wherein the user selected letter(s) is/are changed toitalic; a font formatting implementer, wherein the font of the userselected letter(s) is changed to a certain font; a stereo audio dataoutput implementer, wherein a stereo audio data is processed to beoutput in a stereo fashion; a multiple language implementer, whereinwhen said communication device is powered on, the user interface of saidcommunication device is displayed with the language selected by the userfrom a multiple language candidates before said communication device waspowered off; a caller's information displaying implementer, wherein uponreceiving a phone call, a caller's information which indicates the phonenumber and/or name of the caller is displayed; and an icon displayingimplementer, wherein a first icon corresponding to a first software anda second icon corresponding to a second software are displayed.
 2. Thecommunication device of claim 1, wherein said user interface indicates acommand to open or close file.
 3. The communication device of claim 1,wherein said user interface indicates a command to delete data.
 4. Thecommunication device of claim 1, wherein said user interface indicates acommand to copy, cut, paste, or insert data.
 5. The communication deviceof claim 1, wherein said user interface the name of a directory in whichone or more data are operable to be stored.
 6. The communication deviceof claim 1, wherein said voice communicating implementer and saidmultiple language implementer are implemented simultaneously.
 7. Asystem comprising: a communication device, which is a handheld device,comprising a microphone, a speaker, an input device, a display, and anantenna; a voice communication implementer, wherein voice communicationis implemented with another device in a wireless fashion; a calculationimplementer, wherein a mathematical calculation is implemented byutilizing a numeric data input via said input device; a bold formattingimplementer, wherein the user selected letter(s) is/are changed to bold;an italic formatting implementer, wherein the user selected letter(s)is/are changed to italic; a font formatting implementer, wherein thefont of the user selected letter(s) is changed to a certain font; astereo audio data output implementer, wherein a stereo audio data isprocessed to be output in a stereo fashion; a multiple languageimplementer, wherein when said communication device is powered on, theuser interface of said communication device is displayed with thelanguage selected by the user from a multiple language candidates beforesaid communication device was powered off; a caller's informationdisplaying implementer, wherein upon receiving a phone call, a caller'sinformation which indicates the phone number and/or name of the calleris displayed; and an icon displaying implementer, wherein a first iconcorresponding to a first software and a second icon corresponding to asecond software are displayed.
 8. The system of claim 7, wherein saiduser interface indicates a command to open or close file.
 9. The systemof claim 7, wherein said user interface indicates a command to deletedata.
 10. The system of claim 7, wherein said user interface indicates acommand to copy, cut, paste, or insert data.
 11. The system of claim 7,wherein said user interface the name of a directory in which one or moredata are operable to be stored.
 12. The system of claim 7, wherein saidvoice communicating implementer and said multiple language implementerare implemented simultaneously.
 13. A method for a communication device,which is a handheld device, comprising a microphone, a speaker, an inputdevice, a display, and an antenna, comprising: a voice communicationimplementing step, wherein voice communication is implemented withanother device in a wireless fashion; a calculation implementing step,wherein a mathematical calculation is implemented by utilizing a numericdata input via said input device; a bold formatting implementing step,wherein the user selected letter(s) is/are changed to bold; an italicformatting implementing step, wherein the user selected letter(s) is/arechanged to italic; a font formatting implementing step, wherein the fontof the user selected letter(s) is changed to a certain font; a stereoaudio data output implementing step, wherein a stereo audio data isprocessed to be output in a stereo fashion; a multiple languageimplementing step, wherein when said communication device is powered on,the user interface of said communication device is displayed with thelanguage selected by the user from a multiple language candidates beforesaid communication device was powered off; a caller's informationdisplaying implementing step, wherein upon receiving a phone call, acaller's information which indicates the phone number and/or name of thecaller is displayed; and an icon displaying implementing step, wherein afirst icon corresponding to a first software and a second iconcorresponding to a second software are displayed.
 14. The method ofclaim 13, wherein said user interface indicates a command to open orclose file.
 15. The method of claim 13, wherein said user interfaceindicates a command to delete data.
 16. The method of claim 13, whereinsaid user interface indicates a command to copy, cut, paste, or insertdata.
 17. The method of claim 13, wherein said user interface the nameof a directory in which one or more data are operable to be stored. 18.The method of claim 13, wherein said voice communicating implementer andsaid multiple language implementer are implemented simultaneously.